JP7044256B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of predetermined conditions.

There is known a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special gaming state in which a gaming value is given to a player when the result of the game becomes a special result. In such a gaming machine, the progress of the gaming is controlled by sequentially performing control processing in the control device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-110126

It is necessary to perform a wide variety of control processes in the control device, and it is necessary to efficiently create these control processes in a limited period at the development stage. An object of the present invention is to increase the efficiency of development.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions
Equipped with a production control means that controls the production related to the game
The effect control means is
It has an arithmetic processing means with multiple registers,
A rank is set for each of the plurality of registers, and the order is set.
First control processing and
The second control process called in response to the first call instruction executed in the first control process, and
A fourth control process different from the first control process and the second control process,
The fifth control process called in response to the second call instruction executed in the fourth control process, and the fifth control process.
It is possible to execute the first control process, the second control process, the fourth control process, and the third control process called in response to the third call command executed in the fifth control process.
A first register is associated with the first control process and the fourth control process.
A second register having a lower rank than the first register is associated with the second control process and the fifth control process.
A third register having a lower rank than the second register is associated with the third control process.
When a return value is returned from the third control process to each of the first control process, the second control process, the fourth control process, and the fifth control process, the first control process and the fourth control process are performed. It is characterized in that the return value is stored and returned in the first register associated with the control process .

According to the present invention, the efficiency of development can be improved.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special gaming state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display device. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the common process of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead jackpot determination process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the fall lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the time shortening fluctuation number update process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1 and the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the process in small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the 2-byte data acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol variation control process. It is a flowchart explaining 1 byte subtraction processing. It is a flowchart explaining 1 byte addition processing. It is a flowchart explaining the effect command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / interval processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of ROM which a game control device has. It is a figure explaining the jackpot determination. It is a flowchart explaining the main process of an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot system command processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a setting history calendar displayed when a probability setting value is changed or confirmed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a hole setting screen. It is a flowchart explaining an example of an ending effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an example of setting suggestion effect determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining an example of the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the modification of the ending effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the modification of the hole setting screen. It is a flowchart explaining the 1st modification of the setting suggestion effect determination process. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting history calendar to display as a setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart explaining the 2nd modification of the setting suggestion effect determination process. It is a figure explaining (a) a hole setting screen, (b) a player setting screen. It is a flowchart explaining the hole setting mode processing. It is a flowchart explaining the hall volume adjustment process. It is a flowchart explaining the hall LED brightness adjustment process. It is a flowchart explaining the player setting mode processing. It is a flowchart explaining the player volume adjustment process. It is a flowchart explaining the player LED brightness adjustment processing. It is a flowchart explaining the minus update process. It is a flowchart explaining plus update process. Special Figure 1 This is a program list showing the program structure of game processing. Special figure 2 It is a program list which shows the program structure of a game process. It is a program list which shows the program structure of the fanfare / interval processing. This is a program list showing the program structure of the game process. This is a program list showing the program structure of the process being displayed. It is a program list which shows the program structure of a 2-byte data acquisition process. It is a program list which shows the program structure of a symbol variation control process. It is a program list which shows the program structure of a 1-byte subtraction process. It is a program list which shows the program structure of 1 byte addition processing. This is a program list showing the program structure of the effect command setting process. Special Figure 1 This is a program list showing the program structure of the processing being displayed. Special figure 2 is a program list showing the program structure of the processing being displayed. It is a figure explaining the register structure of the effect control device. It is a program list which shows the program structure of a hole setting mode processing. This is a program list showing the program structure of the hall volume adjustment process. It is a program list which shows the program structure of the hall LED brightness adjustment processing. It is a program list which shows the program structure of a player setting mode processing. It is a program list which shows the program structure of a player volume adjustment process. It is a program list which shows the program structure of the player LED brightness adjustment processing. It is a program list showing the program structure of the minus update process. It is a program list showing the program structure of the plus update process. This is a program list showing the program structure of random number processing. It is a program list which shows the program structure of the range correction processing. It is a figure explaining the relationship of control processing. It is a figure explaining the relationship of control processing. It is a figure explaining an example of the specific effect in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the specific effect processing in 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the specific effect in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the hole setting mode processing in 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the custom setting process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the player setting mode processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the player custom setting process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the specific effect processing in 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining (a) custom setting screen, (b) player custom setting screen in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the specific effect in 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the relationship of the control processing in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the specific effect in 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining another example of the specific effect processing in 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the adjustment of the volume and the brightness in the 2nd modification, and the execution mode of a specific effect.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (
It is assembled to the support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) has a front frame 1
It is stored in a storage unit (not shown) formed on the front side of 2. In addition, the front frame (main body frame) 1
2 is a glass frame 15 (with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30).
A transparent plate holding frame) is attached.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in the abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, a sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided in the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (which supplies a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown))
(Reservoir), the upper plate ball outlet 22 from which the game balls paid out from the payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 flow out, and the upper plate 21 paid out with the upper plate 21 full. A lower plate (dish) 23 for storing, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 21
On the upper edge, the effect button switch 25a for receiving the pressing operation input from the player
An effect button 25 with a built-in effect button 25 is provided. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25.
Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub-display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player rotates the operation unit 24, so that the hitting ball launching device launches the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. do. In addition, the player can use the effect button 25 or the touch panel 2
By operating 9, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is a flat plate-shaped game board main body 8 that serves as a mounting base for various members.
It has 0. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. The game area 32 is provided. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a hitting ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube), for example. Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed. Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path roll. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the start winning opening 36, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 620 can easily win the starting winning opening 36.
Further, on the upper part of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating is provided. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

On the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (not shown), and the movable member always holds a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the game ball is easily flowed into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device (game). It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person.

In the present embodiment, the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is the normal electric solenoid 37.
It is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that opens and closes by advancing and retreating (sliding) in the front-back direction by c, but the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is not limited to this. Ordinary variable winning device 3
The movable member of 7 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side by the normal electric solenoid 37c, or a reverse "c" by the normal electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in the shape of "".
Further, the normal variable winning device 37 can win a game ball even when the movable member is closed, and the game ball may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, the game ball is not accepted or easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 is provided. In the first special variable winning device 38, the opening / closing member (not shown) moves forward and backward (slides).
By doing so, the upper prize opening is converted into a state in which a game ball can flow in. 1st special variable winning device 3
In No. 8, the player is given a predetermined position by converting the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game and facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening. The game value (prize ball) is given. The game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3).

Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), a specific area where the game ball can flow in is provided, and the lever solenoid 38f is provided so as to change the inflow probability of the game ball into the specific area.
A lever member that operates according to (see FIG. 3) is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 3) capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d, a state advantageous for the player is obtained. It occurs (in this embodiment, a high probability state occurs after the end of the special gaming state). The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38.

Further, inside the upper prize opening, a residual ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area is provided. ing. The number of game balls detected by the large prize opening switch 38a provided inside the upper large prize opening (the number of game balls that have flowed into the upper large winning opening), the specific area switch 38d, and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38.
By matching the number of game balls detected in e (the number of game balls ejected from the upper prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize opening are discharged, and basically this confirmation. Until the end of the event, the new top prize opening will not be opened.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, a second special variable winning can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower prize opening) 39 is provided. 2nd special variable winning device 3
In No. 9, the opening / closing member (not shown) moves back and forth (slides) in the front-rear direction to convert the lower prize-winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the lower prize opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 3).

The game area 32 below the starting winning opening 36 is provided with an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won in the winning opening or the like. Further, the game board main body 80 is outside the game area 32.
In the lower right corner of, the special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game)
And a batch display device 50 for executing a normal map variation display game is provided.

The batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like.
It consists of a special figure 1 display (1st special figure fluctuation display unit) 51 for a variable display game, a special figure 2 display (2nd special figure variable display unit) 52 for a special figure 2 variable display game, and an LED lamp. The first storage display unit 53 for notifying the start storage number of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second storage display unit 54 for notifying the start storage number of the special figure 2 variable display game composed of LED lamps are displayed. Be prepared.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39), and is advantageous to the player among left-handed (normal) and right-handed. A first game state display unit 56 for notifying a hitting method (a hitting method corresponding to a game state) and a probability display unit 57 for notifying a probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of a special figure variation display game are provided. There is. The batch display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when a jackpot occurs to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.
Further, the normal map display unit 58 that displays the normal map fluctuation display game, the storage display unit 59 for notifying the start storage number of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the time saving state that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state. A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven. It is displayed that it is changing, and special figure 1
It is configured so that it can be distinguished from the special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "off", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition) is turned on as the result mode of the off, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode of the hit result mode (special result mode) is turned on and the game result is displayed.

The first storage display unit 53 turns off a plurality of LEDs for the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the starting winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. ,lighting blinking)
Display by.
The second storage display unit 54 is a normal fluctuation winning device 37 which is a fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52.
Of the number of winning balls, the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) is turned off and turned on by multiple LEDs (
(Blinking) to display.
The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and when not in the special game state, all the LEDs are turned off, and during the special game state, the LEDs are turned on according to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. Turn it on. The round display unit 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

The first game state display unit 56 is composed of LED lamps and the like. For example, in the case of a game state in which left-handed hitting is more advantageous to the player than right-handed hitting (normal hitting), all the LEDs are turned off and left. When right-handed is more advantageous to the player than right-handed (when right-handed), all LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and for example, the probability state of a big hit is a low probability state (
In the case of the normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and when the probability state of the big hit is the high probability state (probability change state), all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
The U) 111 includes an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operating clock of a CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. The electronic components such as the game control device 100 and the solenoid and the motor driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-DC that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from an AC power supply of 24V.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a converter, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage, and a game microcomputer 1
A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 11 in the event of a power failure,
It has a power failure monitoring circuit, and is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the occurrence and recovery of a power failure in the game control device 100.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, mainly. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information about the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It serves as a means for retaining the memory of game information.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is provided with M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. When the special result mode is adopted, the gaming state is advantageous for the player (special gaming state).
At the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed in the gaming machine 10
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state of identification information,
However, the special result mode may be excluded), and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value is no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <
It is getting higher in the order of premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (not shown).
Random number generation to generate fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in various reach and fluctuation display without reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock fluctuation display game, etc. It is equipped with a circuit and a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of a random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of start storages and the like. Here, CPU111A
Is a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the payout control device 200. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the like. The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the large winning opening switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39, and the gate switch in the general drawing start gate 34. 34a, a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e arranged in the first special variable winning device 38, and an out ball detection switch 32a that detects all game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game. Connected to
An interface chip (proximity I) that inputs a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal.
/ F) 121 is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, and the gate switch 3
The detection signal of 4a is input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharge switch 38e, and the out ball detection switch 3
The detection signal of 2a is input to the fourth input port 126. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, a detection signal of the vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10,
The detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 are also input. It has become so.

Further, a signal from the setting key switch 152 for detecting the operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124. The setting key operation unit is equipped with a keyhole for inserting the setting key.
It is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the state of not being turned to the second position. In some cases, it goes off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values that give special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and operate these operation units. By doing so, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result is assigned in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game. There is. Here, six "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared as probability setting values.

When selecting the probability setting value, R with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position.
By turning on the power of the gaming machine while operating (pressing) the AM initialization switch 112, the probability setting value can be changed to the probability setting value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated during the probability setting value change mode ( By pressing), the probability setting value can be changed. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays information on the probability set value while the operation related to the probability set value is being performed (during the probability setting value change mode and the probability set value confirmation mode), and other than that. In, the calculated base value and the accessory ratio are displayed.

In addition, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position (RAM initialization switch 11).
By turning on the power of the gaming machine (2 is not operated), the probability setting value currently selected is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability setting value cannot be changed. The probability setting value confirmation mode is set. The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is in the open state.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and displays the probability set value as a number from 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. In addition, other types of display devices such as liquid crystal displays may be used.
The probability set value may be indicated by the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a) are the main board 100.
It is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37
The detection signal of a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is an enable signal CE by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, in the input unit 120, a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not the 200 can accept commands), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise is removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided on the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is used for each port 122, 123, of the input unit 120.
It is not supplied to 124 and 126. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61, the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test device via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the machine cannot control the game. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is a first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38, and a second large winning opening solenoid (large) for opening the second special variable winning device 39. Winning port solenoid 2) 39b, 1st special variable winning device 38
While outputting the operation data of the lever solenoid 38f that operates the lever member and the normal electric solenoid 37c that opens the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability set value is displayed. It is a port for output.
Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. On / on the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, on the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game store (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the large winning port solenoids 38b and 39b, the lever solenoids 38f, and the peripheral solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. It is output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135. The external information signal supplied from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137 that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw side of the batch display device 50 to the external device such as the management device is sent to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d for output and a fifth driver 138e for generating and outputting a drive signal by receiving the display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 are provided. Data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

A DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. The fifth driver 138e has a D as a power supply voltage so that the performance display device 153 operating at 5 V can be driven.
C5V is supplied from the power supply device 400.
Further, the second driver 138b for driving the segment line of the batch display device 50 has DC1.
2V is supplied. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. Photocoupler 13
Reference numeral 9 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, 126 are provided. do not have.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36,
The start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, and the gate switch 34a in the normal variable winning device 37 are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and the magnetic field changes when a metal is close to the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying video on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , Sound source LSI 314 that controls the sound output to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It is equipped with.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain the stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure.
A RAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, and V.
It performs processing such as instructing the content of the output video to the DP 312, instructing the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lighting the decorative lamp, controlling the drive of the motor and the solenoid, and managing the effect time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal INT from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is to be entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). Frame decoration LED control circuit 333, game board 3 that drives and controls a frame decoration device having an LED (light emitting diode) provided (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like).
Board effect device 44 (for example, display device 41) provided in 0 (including the center case 40)
A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control a movable accessory (such as a movable accessory) that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display in the above. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. A function to detect the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the motor. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Further, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V.
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as, DC 3.3V based on DC 5V.
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control the lamp, the motor, and the like are supplied to reset the state. Further, the effect control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
When the N45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on, the cooling FAN45 is driven.

FIG. 5 shows the jackpot probability, the fall probability, the small hit probability, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory.
It is used as a term having the same meaning in this specification.

The value (probability value) of the jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is special figure 1 and special figure 2.
The probability value in the low probability state and the probability value in the high probability state are the probability values as shown in FIG. 5A, respectively.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the same probability value is assigned as the probability value in the high probability state to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6", but different probabilities. A value may be assigned. That is, the probability value in the high probability state may be switchable in multiple stages.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the same probability value is assigned to "setting 1" and "setting 2" as the probability value in the low probability state, but different probability values are assigned. It may be assigned. The same applies to "setting 3" and "setting 4", and "setting 5" and "setting 6". That is, the probability value in the low probability state is not limited as long as it can be switched to multiple stages. Further, the same probability value may be assigned to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as the probability value in the low probability state. That is, the probability value in the low probability state may not be switchable in multiple stages.

Further, the effect distribution and the like may be different between "setting 1" and "setting 2" having the same probability value in the assigned low probability state. The same applies to "setting 3" and "setting 4", and "setting 5" and "setting 6".
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, there are six probability setting values (“setting 1”) for three types of probability values (probability value in the low probability state and probability value in the high probability state). "-" Setting 6 ") is assigned, but for example, three probability setting values (for example," setting 1 ") are assigned to three types of probability values.
-"Setting 3") may be assigned and the remaining three probability setting values (for example, "Setting 4" to "Setting 6") may be omitted.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the special gaming state based on the big hit (first special gaming state), the gaming ball flows into the specific region (probability variation operating region) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific region switch 38d. By being played (passing V), the high probability state is set after the end of the special gaming state, and the low probability state is set when the fall lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed is won. The probability of winning the fall lottery is as shown in FIG. 5 (b).
Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 5 (c). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. In addition, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not won in duplicate. In this embodiment, the small hit is not provided in the special figure 1 but is provided only in the special figure 2, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, but the small hit is not limited to this, and for example, the small hit. May be provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, when the small hit is provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hit probability may be the same in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 is better than the special figure 1. May be higher, and special figure 1 may be higher than special figure 2.

Further, FIG. 5D shows the jackpot types that can be selected in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the distribution probabilities of each jackpot type.
Special figure 1 The types of jackpots (first special result) in the variable display game are 10R probability variation jackpot and 4
There are three types: R probability variation jackpot and 10R normal jackpot. Similarly, there are three types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot. These jackpot types are selected based on the jackpot symbol random numbers. The numbers of each jackpot type indicate the actual number of rounds, and the probability change indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into a specific area (probability change operation area) and is likely to become a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state. It is shown that the possibility that the game ball flows into a specific area (probability change operation area) is low and it is difficult to reach a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state.
Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds for which opening control is performed so that a winning ball is actually generated by opening the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The number of each jackpot type is the number of rounds at the time of jackpot (the number of actual rounds + the number of rounds in which the opening time of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is short and the opening control is performed so that the winning ball does not actually occur). May be.

Further, a first special result may be provided in which the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area is lower than that of the probabilistic jackpot, but the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area is higher than that of the normal jackpot.
Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball is in the high probability state depending on whether or not the gaming ball flows into the specific region (probability variation operation region). If the game ball does not flow into the area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, if the game ball flows into the specific area, the high probability state occurs.

6 (a) to 6 (c) show the opening mode in each round in each jackpot type. The details of the opening mode are shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 6A, in the 10R probability variation jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened and the specific region (probability variation operation region) is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed.
Long opening with V is an opening mode in which a game ball is likely to flow into a specific region (probability variable operating region). Then, after the second round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and a long opening without V is performed.
As shown in FIG. 6B, in the 4R probability variation jackpot, the first special variation winning device 3 in the first round.
A long opening with V is performed to open 8 and open a specific area (probability variable operation area). Then, from the 2nd round to the 4th round, the 1st special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened.
8 is opened, but the specific area is not opened. V-less short opening is performed. The V-less short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility that the game ball will flow into the large winning opening is lower than the V-less long opening. That is, the long opening without V is an opening mode in which a winning ball is actually generated, and the short opening without V is an opening mode in which the opening time is short and no winning ball is actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 6 (c), in the 10R normal jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and the specific region (probability variable operating region) is opened in the first round, and a short opening with V is performed. Short opening with V is an opening mode in which there is a possibility that a game ball may flow into a specific region (probability variable operating region), which is lower than long opening with V. Then, from the second round onward, a V-less long opening that opens the first special variable winning device 38 is performed.
It is V performed in the first round that the game ball can flow into a specific area (probability change operation area).
Yes Long open and V Yes Short open only. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is the round in which the gaming ball may flow into the specific area, is the first round. The specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. again,
The specific round may be multiple times, such as the first round and the fifth round.

As shown in FIG. 7A, in the long opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25,000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (a predetermined number).
For example, if any of the conditions for winning 9) game balls is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 3
8 is closed to end the round (t12). After that, the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper prize opening is started (t12), and the interval time is started when the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper prize opening is completed (t12).
At t13), when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t14). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 7B, in the long opening with V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Furthermore, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38
While f is set to the ON state, the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers a specific area and the game ball cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retracts from the specific area and the game ball can flow in. It becomes. Further, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is effective is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 38d, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 msec has elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, the game ball that has won a prize immediately after the first special variable prize device 38 is opened may flow into a specific area.

The first special variable winning device 38 is closed 200 msec after the start of the round (t).
34). Then, after 2700 msec has elapsed, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (
t35), the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends when either the condition that the openable time of 25,000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins is satisfied. (T39). After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t39), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t41), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t42). .. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, after the second opening (t35) of the first special variable winning device 38, the lever solenoid 3
8f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Further, the specific area switch 38d is also effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is a sufficiently long opening, and the lever solenoid 38f remains ON for a long time, so that the game ball will almost certainly flow into a specific area. Become. Therefore, when the jackpot type is probabilistic, it will almost certainly be in a high probability state.

Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be turned on for a predetermined time even after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variable winning device 38 just before closing. It is possible for the game ball to flow into a specific area. The first special variable winning device 38 is due to the passage of the openable time or the winning of a predetermined number of game balls.
Is closed, and when all the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening, the lever solenoid 38f is discharged at the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41). Is turned off and the operation is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.

In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening. If all of the lever solenoid 38f is discharged by the end of the period (t43) when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and operates when the discharge is completed. Is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.
In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening. If not all of the lever solenoid 38f is discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43) The lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is terminated. In this case, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t44) 100 msec after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43).

As shown in FIG. 7 (c), in the short opening with V, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the long opening with V is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. The round ends based on (t54). Since the opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is for a very short time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time, the possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific region is low. Therefore, it is rare that a high probability state occurs when the jackpot type is normal.

The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the switching between valid and invalid of the specific area switch 38d are performed in the same manner as in the case of long opening with V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38. t55 to t63). Therefore, if the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time of the remaining ball in the upper prize opening has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. The operation is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid. If all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period (t62) when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 3
At the end of the period in which the 8f is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state and the operation is terminated, and after the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state (t62).
After 100 msec, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

Further, the first opening (t31 to t34) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the long opening with V shown in FIG. 7 (b) and the first special variation in the short opening with V shown in FIG. 7 (c). The opening of the winning device 38 (t51 to t54) is set to such an opening time that at least one game ball can be won by the first special variable winning device 38.

As shown in FIG. 7 (d), in the short open without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (t71) with the start of the round, and the openable time of 200 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces). ) When any of the conditions for winning the game ball is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 38
Closes and ends the round (t72). However, since the openable time is short, it is rare that a predetermined number of prizes, which are the conditions for closing, occur, and in most cases, the game is closed as the openable time elapses. After that, the upper prize opening remaining ball processing time is started (t72), the interval time is started when the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time ends (t73), and the next round is started when the interval time ends (t74). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, FIG. 6D shows an opening mode in the second special gaming state (special gaming state based on small hits). In the second special game state, first, the small hit fanfare time is started, and then
When the small hit fanfare time is over, the second special variable winning device 39 is released and 160.
The second special variable winning device 39 is closed when either the condition that the openable time of 0 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls is won is satisfied. After that, the small hit remaining ball processing time is started, when the small hit remaining ball processing time ends, the small hit ending time starts, and when the small hit ending time ends, the second special gaming state ends. The second
There may be a plurality of types of opening / closing modes (opening time and number of opening times) in the special gaming state, and in that case, for example, it is determined which opening / closing mode is set (adopted) based on the small hit symbol.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing a game state transition in the present embodiment.
The game states include the normal game state ST1, the first specific game state ST2, and the second specific game state ST.
There are three. In addition to this, as the special gaming state, there are a first special gaming state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special gaming state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability from which the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, and the main in the game state. The main starting area, which is the starting area to be aimed at, the main variable special map, which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a left-handed hit can be aimed at winning a prize in the starting winning opening 36, and a right-handed hit can be aimed at winning a prize in the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. Further, in each game state, the game is designed on the assumption that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly advanced, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to play the game mainly in the special figure variation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design so that the game progresses. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, the special figure probability is a low probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and there is no special figure fluctuation display game or normal. Figure Fluctuation display There is no time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. Further, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. In this normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state ST1. ..

In the second specific gaming state ST3, the special figure probability is basically a low probability state. However, in the special game state based on the normal jackpot, when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 (when the V is passed), the probability state is high. In addition, there is a general electric support that facilitates winning by improving the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable winning device 37. If there is a normal power support, there is also a time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal map fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the chance mode. Further, the main variable special map is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37.
That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In the first specific game state ST2, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure changing display game. There is a certain amount of time to shorten the fluctuation time of. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the small hit RUSH. Further, the main variable special map is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In this embodiment, the probability of hitting the normal map fluctuation display game with the normal electric support (normal probability) is the same as the probability without the normal electric support (normal probability). In a state where there is a normal power support, the normal probability can be set to a higher probability (high probability state of the normal figure) than the normal probability (low probability state of the normal figure).
Further, in the present embodiment, the state without the normal variable winning device 37 means that the normal variable winning device 37 is opened, but the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 is shorter than the state with the normal variable winning device 37. be.

In the first specific gaming state ST2 and the second specific gaming state ST3, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal gaming state ST1, and the normal variation winning device 37 is hit right. It is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at. The special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 variable display game (in the case of this embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0), and the small hit is won rather than the big hit. Since there is a high probability of this, small hits occur frequently in the first specific gaming state ST2 and the second specific gaming state ST3.
If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, the state in which the normal electric support is provided continues even in the special game state based on the small hit, and in the first specific game state ST2. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, the state without the normal electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small hit. Further, in the special gaming state based on the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variable winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 6D).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, most of the right-handed game balls in the special game state based on the small hit are normally variable prizes. A second device that wins a prize and is arranged below the normally variable winning device 37.
It does not flow down to the special variable winning device 39. Therefore, in the second specific gaming state ST3, small hits occur frequently, but it is difficult to increase the number of balls held by the player due to the small hits.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit in the first specific game state ST2, most of the right-handed game balls in the special game state based on the small hit are normally variable prizes. Instead of winning a prize in the device 37, the game flows down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the player's game ball by a small hit. That is, in the first specific game state ST2, small hits occur frequently and the player's ball increases, so that the effect mode is small hit RUSH.
It is said to be a mode called.

Of these three gaming states, the normal gaming state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific gaming state ST3 is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state ST1 because it has a general electric support. The first specific gaming state ST2 is a high-probability state, and further
Since the number of balls held by the player increases due to the frequent occurrence of small hits, this is a state more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3.

The transition of the gaming state is performed by ending the first special gaming state based on the derivation of the first special result, exhausting the specified number of games, and winning the fall lottery which is the transition lottery to the low probability state. .. Basically, the probability variation jackpot is derived and becomes the first special gaming state, and in the first special gaming state, the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38 and the specific area switch. When it is detected in 38d (when there is V passage), it shifts to the first specific gaming state ST2 after the end of the first special gaming state. On the other hand, when the probability variation jackpot is derived and the first special gaming state is reached, and the game ball does not flow into the specific region (probability variation operation region) of the first special variation winning device 38 in the first special gaming state (no V passage). In the case of), the state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1 after the end of the first special gaming state. In addition, if a normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special gaming state, and there is no V passage in the first special gaming state, the second specific gaming state ST3 (special figure low probability) after the end of the first special gaming state. 2nd specific game state ST
Move to 3). On the other hand, if a normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special gaming state, and there is a V passage in the first special gaming state, the second specific gaming state ST3 (special figure high probability) after the end of the first special gaming state. It shifts to the second specific game state ST3).
Further, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (support count) from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST3, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Also, the first
If the fall lottery is won in the specific game state ST2, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. again,
When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a hit (special result). Further, when the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) toward the gaming area 32 from a hitting ball launching device (not shown). The launched game ball is
The game area 32 is flowed down while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening 36 are used.
, Ordinary variable winning device 37, 1st special variable winning device 38 or 2nd special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and is discharged from the gaming area 32. .. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the gaming ball into the left gaming area (so-called left-handed) to move the starting winning opening 36 or the starting winning opening 36 to the left. It is possible to aim for a prize in the arranged general prize opening 35, and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device, and the normal variable winning device 37 It is possible to aim for a prize in the device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 arranged on the right side of the second special variable winning device 39.

A gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 is provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and a game area 32 is provided.
When the game ball driven inside passes through the start gate 34 of the normal drawing, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start storages is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. If it is less than), add the number of memory for starting the normal figure (+1)
), And one memory for starting the normal drawing is stored in the ROM 111B. The stored number of the normal map start prize is displayed on the normal map hold display 56 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory for starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game is judged. Then, the process of starting the normal map fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time in the normal map display unit 58 provided in the batch display device 50 as a process for executing the normal map variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the ordered order, the process of displaying the normal map fluctuation display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.
In addition, the general drawing display unit 58 is composed of a display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information.
It is also possible to use a character symbol or the like to display the variable for a predetermined time and then stop and display the result.

When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern, which is a special result mode, is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display unit 58, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to display the movable member of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Control is performed to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the normal map display unit 58 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the out of alignment.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) of the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is set.
The second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces). Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the big hit random value, the big hit symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start storage and the second start storage. Then, the stored number of the start storage is the first storage display unit 53 (special figure 1 hold display) and the second storage display unit 54 (special figure 2 hold display) for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50. It is also displayed as a decorative special drawing start memory display on the display device 41 of the center case 40.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 display 52 (1st variation display device) based on the second start memory. The special figure 2 fluctuation display game is played on the second fluctuation display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game becomes the first special result (big hit). In that case, one of the special figure fluctuation display games is terminated as a result other than the special result (missing result). In addition, if the other special figure variation display game has a second special result (small hit) during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the one is concerned until the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit. The special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area). It serves as a first execution control means for controlling. Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is
It serves as a second execution control means for controlling the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area).

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after the variable display is performed, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state).
Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode). It becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, special figure 1
The display 51 serves as a first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second variable display means capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37.

Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a jackpot game state (first special game state).
After the end of, control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hitting is high and there is a general electric support). It is possible to do. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms the specific game state generating means.

In addition, the display device 41 corresponds to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.
A decorative special figure variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) is being executed. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special map variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 variablely displays the decorative identification information in accordance with the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (decorative variable display game). It is a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. In addition, the gaming machine 1
The special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in 0.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game (the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is 0), but it is special in the normal gaming state. FIG. 2 Fluctuation display A long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player to hit left to aim at the start winning opening 36 and play the special figure 1 variable display game.
The length variation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). Further, the time of the long fluctuation may be different depending on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Specifically, for example, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is off or a small hit, a long variation with a variation time of about 10 minutes is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game. Special Figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the special figure 2
A long variation with a variation time of about 5 minutes may be selected as the variation pattern of the variation display game.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the game control device 10
The control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of 0 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 9, first, a process for disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer which is the start address of an area for saving the value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs. Stack pointer setting process (step X2)
I do. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and a predetermined register (for example, D) is specified.
The upper address of the RAM start address is set in the register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper rank is 00h.
Or 01h is taken, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, the firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, the game control device 1 serving as the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value.
Waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from 00 to start normally.
Is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the power of the gaming machine is supplied. Wait for it to be blocked.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. Determine if there is any. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the set number of checks. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54 described later. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when a power failure has not occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10).
If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, when the waiting time has ended,
Permission to read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is granted (step X11), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) is set (step X13), and the gaming microcomputer is set. A process (step X14) for activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator is a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 1 based on the divided signal.
The 11A is provided with a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X16), and if it is normal (step X16; Y).
Power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) in which the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal.
(Step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), the checksum calculation process (step X18) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed, and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), the step. It is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state based on the state read by X6 (step X21). Then, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is issued to the effect control board (effect control). It is transmitted to the device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), the command for notifying the main abnormality error is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag set before the occurrence of a power failure. That is, if the power of the gaming machine is cut off and restarted while the probability setting value is being changed,
Since the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). As a result, in the performance display device 153,
The display as shown in FIG. 13 (h) is performed. After that, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26).
, Return to step X25.

Further, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM error flag is set (step X27). Then, when the RAM error flag is not set (step X27).
; N) is set to the probability setting changing flag (step X29). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. Based on receiving the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and the speaker 1.
Notification indicating that the probability set value is being changed is given by voice output by 9a and 19b.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes “setting 1”. After that, step X29,
The process of X30 is performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step X22; N and step X23). In N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). Then, when the setting key switch 152 is not in the ON state (step X35; N).
), It is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the ON state (step X43; N).
That is, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the off state, the process proceeds to step X41 to perform the process when the power failure is normally restored.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step X43).
In Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make a means of conversion.

When the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state (step X35; Y), the probability setting confirmation flag is set (step X36). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is issued to the effect control board (effect control device 300).
(Step X37). The effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting confirmation, and the display of the display device 41, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46.
Due to the light emission of the panel, the operation of the board effect device 44, the output of sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
Notifies that the probability setting value is being confirmed.

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 msec or longer, the value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) of the timer interrupt process in the probability setting value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, and in other cases, the external information editing of the timer interrupt process is edited. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, 12
When the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 8 msec, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is output for 128 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode. To. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 ms. However, at least 5 after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode.
Since it is necessary to output a security signal for 0 msec, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the determination is not made based on the state read in step X6 (state at power-on), but the state read in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) (current state). Judgment based on. When it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
When the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34), and when a power failure has not occurred (step X34;
In N), the process returns to step X33, and if a power failure occurs (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting changing flag is set, in step X23 of the main process (FIGS. 9 and 10) after the power failure is restored. It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process for disabling interrupts (step X38) is performed. Processing to allow interrupts (step X32)
) And the process of disabling interrupts (steps X38, X55), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec). In the timer interrupt process, the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122), which is a process related to the probability set value.
) Is performed. That is, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). The effect control device 300 is based on receiving a command to end the notification.
The execution notification (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is terminated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Is the area to be initialized (for example, the power failure inspection area,
The power failure recovery process (step X41) is performed to save the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the checksum area and the area related to error fraud monitoring. The probability setting confirmation flag is cleared in this step X41.
After that, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of this embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of model designation commands, probability setting information commands, special figure 1 hold count commands, special figure 2 hold count commands, probability information commands, effect count information commands, screen designation commands, and the like. Send the command. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress, the command is waiting for a customer. Send the command of the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step X44, the RAM area for the probability set value (work area (1 byte area of the probability set value)) and the RAM area for performance display (display of base value and accessory ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, clear the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in this step X44. In step X44,
You may or may not clear the stack area or unused area.

Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X45).
.. The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step X46, a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect number information command, and a RAM initialization command (customer waiting). Along with displaying the demo screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands,
It also sends a command for the number of times of production information and a command for the number of times of support, which is information on the number of times the special figure variation display game has been executed with the support of Fuden.

Next, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on.
Various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit random number) ), R as the initial value (start value) of the random number (fall lottery random number) that determines whether or not the fall lottery is won.
After saving in the predetermined area of WM (step X48), interrupt is permitted (step X4).
9). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step X50) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the winning random number, and the fall lottery random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are processed by the program. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a unit. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" that changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. The random numbers are +1 or -1.
It may be a counter-type update by, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear in pieces without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the winning random number, and the fall lottery random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.
In this embodiment, since a random number (hit symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the normal figure is not provided, there is only one type of hit symbol of the normal figure, but a hit symbol random number is provided and the hit symbol of the normal figure is provided. May be selected from a plurality of types.

Initial value of step X50 A process of disabling interrupts after random number update processing (step X51)
Is performed, and the performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54), and if no power failure has occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process is performed. (Step X5
Return to 0). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process, the performance display editing process, and the power failure monitoring are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X50) (step X49), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step X50, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and if such a method is adopted, the initial value is used in both cases. In order to avoid executing the random number update process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt before updating and canceling the interrupt when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process.
When the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

On the other hand, when a power failure occurs (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X59) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X60) for saving the calculated checksum, the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X61), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the start of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.
Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and a RAM 111C.
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112).
The game control device 100) is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and FIG. 11
Timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X1).
01). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches, signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and when the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y). , Probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122)
To end the timer interrupt processing.
On the other hand, when both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are based on the output data set in various processes. , Lever solenoid 38f, Fuden solenoid 37
Output processing (step X105) for performing drive control of the actuator such as c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. Generated within the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready to launch.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step X106), a random number update process 1 (step X107), in which commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes are output to the payout control device 200.
Random number update process 2 (step X108) is performed. After that, monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, setting the prize ball, the front frame and the glass The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X109) for opening the frame and monitoring errors such as illegal winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable prize device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) in the first special variable prize device 38 is The number of game balls that have flowed into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 38a) is exceeded. If an abnormal discharge is occurring, the abnormal discharge flag is set. Then, if an abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, when abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the start port 1 switch 3
Start port switch monitoring process (step X) to monitor the winning of 6a and start port 2 switch 37a
111). In the start port switch monitoring process, the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37
Various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball. And special figure 1
Special figure 1 game processing (step X112) that performs processing related to the variable display game, special figure 2 game processing (step X113) that performs processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and normal figure game processing that performs processing related to the normal figure variable display game. (Step X114) is performed, and a segment LED provided on the gaming machine 10 to display a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game.
Segment LED editing process (step X115)
I do.

Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process (step X116) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality, and a process that checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality. Radio fraud monitoring process (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring process (step X118) that checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 and determines whether there is an abnormality, and determines whether abnormal discharge has occurred. Perform the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step X119). Further, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer and performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display monitor 153 are performed, and the timer interrupt processing is completed. do.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is also a gaming machine that needs to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
FIG. 12 shows the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X1) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process.
22) is shown. In this probability setting change / confirmation process, first, it is determined whether the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (range of 0 to 5 in this embodiment) (step X13).
1).
When the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y)
The probability setting value display data corresponding to the value (current probability setting value) of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is set (step X132), and the probability setting value display data is transmitted to the second output port. It is output to the fifth driver 138e via 134 (step X134). This will result in
In the performance display device 153, the display as shown in FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (f) is performed.
On the other hand, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131).
In N), turn-off data is set as the probability set value display data (step X133).
The probability set value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, in the performance display device 153, FIG. 13 (g)
The display as shown in is performed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the performance display device 153 is composed of four 7-segment displays (7-segment type display) arranged side by side. In the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the current probability setting value is shown on the rightmost 7-segment display among these four 7-segment displays, and the remaining 7-segment display shows "SET". It is designed to indicate the character.
Specifically, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "0", the current probability setting value is "setting 1", so 7 at the right end as shown in FIG. 13 (a). When "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "1", the current probability setting value is "1".
Since it is "setting 2", "2" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13 (b), and when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "2", it is currently. The probability setting value of is "Setting 3"
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13 (c), "3" is displayed on the 7-segment display at the right end, and RW.
When the value of the area for the probability setting value in M is "3", the current probability setting value is "setting 4", so that "setting 4" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13 (d). 4 ”is displayed, and when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is“ 4 ”, the current probability setting value is“ setting 5 ”, so that it is at the right end as shown in FIG. 13 (e). When "5" is displayed on the 7-segment display and the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "5", the current probability setting value is "setting 6", so FIG. 1
As shown in 3 (f), "6" is displayed on the 7-segment display at the right end. Further, when the value in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range (abnormal value), the 7-segment display at the right end is turned off as shown in FIG. 13 (g).
For example, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "0", the probability setting value display data is "1" in the first digit, "T" in the second digit, and the third digit. The probability setting value display data instructing to display "E" and "S" in the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step X1).
35). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Next, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X136). In step X136, on-data of the security signal is output regardless of whether or not the security signal control timer is timed up. Therefore, the security signal will continue to be output during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode (while the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirmation flag is set).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Ends the probability setting change / confirmation process. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process during execution is the probability setting change / in the first timer interrupt process after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. It is determined whether it is a confirmation process (step X138).

If it is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is not the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; N).
Determines if there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139).
In step X139, the RAM initialization switch 1 is performed in the immediately preceding input process (step X103).
When an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of 12 is detected, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112. If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y),
That is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5 (step X140), and the probability setting change / confirmation process is performed. finish. The value updated in step X140 (probability setting value after update) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change / confirmation process.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, “setting 1” to “setting 6” are applied to three types of probability values (probability value in a low probability state and probability value in a high probability state). However, for example, "setting 1" to "setting 3" may be assigned to three types of probability values (probability value in a low probability state and probability value in a high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the area for the probability setting value of RWM is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 2.

By operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the mode can be shifted to the probability setting value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated during the probability setting value change mode. You can change the probability setting value with.
Since the RAM initialization switch 112 can only perform a pressing operation, it is not possible to distinguish between a transition operation for shifting to the probability set value change mode and a change operation for changing the probability set value. Therefore, when the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode) continues even during the probability setting value change mode, that is, the RAM initialization switch is performed from the time the power is turned on. If 112 is kept pressed, the probability setting value is updated (changed) according to the operation even though the operation is a transition operation.

Specifically, in the input process of the timer interrupt process (step X103), the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input process is in the off state, and the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input process is in the off state. When the state is on, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on, the input process immediately before the power is turned off is the previous input process, and the input process immediately after the power is turned on is the current input process. There is a high possibility that the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the process is an off state. That is, if the transition operation continues even during the probability setting value change mode, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. ) Is likely to be detected.
Therefore, in this case, if the processing of steps X139 and 140 is performed in the probability setting change / confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the transition operation. There may be a problem that the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such inconvenience, the process of step X138 is performed, and the process of steps X139 and X140 is not performed in the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. I will do it. As a result, regarding the update (change) of the probability setting value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has been continued since the power was turned on (
That is, since the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode is ignored, it is possible to prevent an unintended update.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is the first gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result.
A storage means for storing one of a plurality of probability setting values to which the operation unit (setting key operation unit) and the second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) and the probability values used for the lottery of the game are assigned. (Game control device 100 (RAM111C)) and a mode for shifting to a probability setting value change mode in which the probability set value can be changed in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the power of the game machine is turned on. In response to the operation of the transition means (game control device 100) and the second operation unit in the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value stored in the storage means (value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM). ) Is provided with a setting changing means (game control device 100), the operation of the second operation unit for shifting to the probability setting value changing mode (shifting operation), and the second for changing the probability setting value. The operation (change operation) of the operation unit is the same operation (pressing operation in the case of this embodiment), and the setting changing means continues from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on even in the probability setting value changing mode. It is configured not to respond to the operation of the second operation unit.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on continues even after the transition to the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value is not changed during that time, which is not intended. It is possible to prevent the change of the probability set value.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
FIG. 14 shows the start port switch monitoring process (step X1) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process.
11) is shown. In this start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (start winning port 36)
Prepare a winning monitoring table (step X491) and perform hard random number acquisition processing (step X49).
2) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is information with a start opening prize set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X49).
3).

If the starting opening winning information is not set based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (normal gaming state). (Step X494). And, when the special figure is low probability & no time reduction (step X49)
4; In Y), the process proceeds to step X497. In addition, if the special figure has a low probability and the time is not shortened (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495).
, Performs the effect command setting process (step X496).

Based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs right-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform right-handed by display, voice, or the like. When in a specific gaming state or a special gaming state, right-handed is more advantageous for the player, and the starting winning opening 36, which is designed so that a prize is not won unless the player is left-handed, is in the specific gaming state or the special gaming state. When a prize is detected inside, a right-handed instruction is notified.

Then, a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 1 is prepared (step X497).
, Special figure start port switch common processing (step X498) is performed. Next, a starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table was prepared (step X499), a hard random number acquisition process (step X500) was performed, and a big hit random number was acquired based on the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is information on the starting opening winning that is set in the case (step X501).

When there is a start opening prize based on the prize in the normal variable prize device 37 and the information is not set (
In step X501; N), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the start opening winning is set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; Y), is the Fuden (normal variable winning device 37) operating, that is, normal? When it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in an open state where it is possible to win a prize (step X502), and when the normal electric power is operating (step X502; Y),
The process proceeds to step X504. On the other hand, when the electric power is not operating (step X502; N)
(Step X503).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or fraud has occurred.
If there is a winning game ball in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal winnings.
Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If an illegal operation is occurring (step X503; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more. Further, when the fraudulent electric power is not occurring (step X503; N), a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step X504), and the special figure start port switch common process (step X50) is prepared.
5) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
FIG. 15 shows a special figure start port switch common process (steps X498, X505) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a.

In this special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is input to the gaming machine 1.
The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device of 0, is loaded (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step X521). X523).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is R.
Saved in the start port signal output count area of the WM (step X524), the number of special figure hold (start memory) corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored, that is, the number of special figure hold (start memory) to be updated is the upper limit value (step X524). Here, it is determined whether it is less than 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is not saved after the update because it loops due to +1 update and becomes 0.

Then, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step X525; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1. (Step X526), the target start opening winning flag is saved (step X527). Next, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared by the hard random number acquisition process is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM. (Step X529).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X5).
30), save in the RWM jackpot symbol random number storage area (step X531). Next, the fall lottery random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and the RWM is prepared.
Save in the fall lottery random number storage area (step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is in the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) (step X53).
4) If the starting port 2 is not won (step X534; N), the process proceeds to step X537. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X534; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). ..

Then, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step X537), and the special figure hold information determination process (step X53) which is the look-ahead process is performed.
8) is performed. Next, a start port switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step X539), and an effect command setting process (step X540) is prepared.
To end the special figure start port switch common processing.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36, and the predetermined random number can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit as the first starting memory. It serves as a starting memory means. Further, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and the predetermined random number is used as the second random number.
It serves as a second start storage means that can store up to a predetermined upper limit as start storage.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
16 and 17 show the special figure hold information determination process (step X538) in the above-mentioned special figure start port switch common process. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In this special figure hold information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (during the first special gaming state) (step X541), and if the jackpot is in progress (step X541; Y), the special figure hold information determination is made. End the process. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not hit (step X541; N), the start opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special drawing start opening switch common process is checked, and the starting opening 1 (starting opening winning opening 36) is won. (Step X542).

In the case of winning a prize in the starting port 1 (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 to perform look-ahead. On the other hand, if the starting port 1 is not won (step X542; N),
It is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal gaming state) (step X543). Then, when the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (step X543; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. That is, in the normal gaming state, long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, but in this case, look-ahead is not performed. On the other hand, if it is not in the special figure low probability & no time reduction (step X543; N)
), It is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step X544).

If the special figure is not in high probability (step X544; N), the process proceeds to step X548. On the other hand, when the special figure high probability is in progress (step X544; Y), is the value of the fall lottery random number prepared in step X532 of the special figure start port switch common process within the range of the judgment value of the fall winning? Determination (step X545). Next, a look-ahead fall lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), an effect command setting process (step X547) is performed, and a low probability determination flag is prepared (step X548).

Then, a look-ahead jackpot determination process (step X549) is performed to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit low probability determination value). When the determination result is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step X551), and the preparation is made in step X530 of the special figure start port switch common process. Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number (
Step X552) and step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X550; N), the start port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start port switch common process is checked, and the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). (Step X553).

If the starting port 2 is not won (step X553; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X558), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X553; Y), the small hit determination process (step X554) of determining whether the big hit random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. I do. and,
When the determination result is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X556), and step X535 of the special figure start port switch common process is set.
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (step X557), and then
The process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step X555;
In N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step X558), and the stop symbol information acquired in step X552 or X557 or the stop symbol information set in step X558 is saved in the symbol information area (step). X559).

After that, the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information (
(Low probability) is prepared (step X560), and the effect command setting process (step X561)
I do.
Next, a pre-reading jackpot determination process (step X563) in which a high probability determination flag is prepared (step X562) and whether or not the jackpot random value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit high probability determination value) is determined to be a jackpot. I do. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step X565), and in step X530 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step X566), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X564; N)
To check the start port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure start port switch common process, it is determined whether or not the start port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) has won a prize (step X567).

If the starting port 2 is not won (step X567; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X572), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting port 2 (step X567; Y), the small hit determination process (step X568) of determining whether the big hit random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. I do. and,
When the determination result is a small hit (step X569; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X570), and step X535 of the special figure start port switch common process is set.
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (step X571), and then
The process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step X569;
In N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step X572), and it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step X573).

Then, when the special figure is not in high probability (step X573; N), the process proceeds to step X575. On the other hand, when the special figure is in high probability (step X573; Y), step X55
The stop symbol information acquired in step X566 or X571 or the stop symbol information set in step X572 is overwritten and saved in the symbol information area in which the stop symbol information is saved in step X576 (step X574). The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is
It is used for look-ahead of fluctuation patterns.

Next, the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information (
Prepare (high probability) (step X575), and produce command setting process (step X576).
I do. As described above, in the present embodiment, each time the special figure reservation information determination process is executed, the result of determination by the jackpot low probability determination value and the result of determination by the jackpot high probability determination value are the effect control device 3.
It is sent to 00.
Next, the special figure information setting process (step X577) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process (step X578) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed. I do.
Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X579), and the effect command setting process (step X580) is performed to determine the special figure hold information. End the process. The special figure information setting process in step X577 and the variation pattern setting process in step X578 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special map normal processing.

By the above processing, the look-ahead fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and the look-ahead stop including the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target. A pre-reading variation pattern command including information on the symbol command and the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, whether or not the result-related information corresponding to the start memory (whether or not the jackpot probability state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state (normal probability state)), and whether or not the jackpot or small hit is performed. , The type of variation pattern) determination result (look-ahead result) of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, before the start timing of the effect control device 30
It is possible to notify 0, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the player is notified of the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. It becomes possible to do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means capable of determining the result of the variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the variation display game based on the start storage stored in the start storage means. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result is obtained). Make a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not limited to the start prize when the start memory is generated.
It may be any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
FIG. 18 shows a look-ahead jackpot determination process (step X) in the above-mentioned special figure hold information determination process.
549, X563) is shown. In this look-ahead jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step X581), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step X582). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step X582; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step X587), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed.
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step X582; N), it is determined whether the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (step X583). When the judgment flag is a high probability judgment flag (step X583; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X584), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, when the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (step X583; N), that is, when the determination flag is the low probability determination flag, the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X585). ), It is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step X587), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586; N), that is, when the jackpot is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step X588), and the look-ahead jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 19 shows the special figure 1 game processing (step X112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing.
showed that. In the special figure 1 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In this special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag set when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted is set (step Y99). In the special figure 1 variable display game, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) and the second special gaming state is executed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game. , Is interrupted during the execution of the second special gaming state.

Special figure 1 When the interruption flag is not set (step Y99; N), that is, special figure 1
If the variable display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y100, and the subsequent processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game is performed. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y99; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game in steps Y100 to Y115 is performed. Instead, the process proceeds to step Y116. As a result, while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

In the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game, first, whether the big hit / small hit of special figure 2 is in progress.
That is, it is determined whether or not the game is in a special gaming state to be executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit (step Y100). Then, in the case of a big hit / small hit in FIG. 2 (step Y100; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103. On the other hand, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y100; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y101) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y102) is performed.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set the large winning opening count command to be sent to the production control device 300 based on the winning to the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when the specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. Process. In the special figure 1 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the result of the special figure 2 variable display game. Regarding the special game state executed based on the fact that is a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the specific area is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operating area). Performs the process of setting the area passage flag. Based on the fact that this specific area passage flag is set, a process for generating a special gaming state is performed.

Next, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y103), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). And special figure 1
If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y116. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process is branched to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. Therefore, first, the special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is prepared in the register (step Y10).
5), special figure 1 game processing number is loaded and prepared (step Y106), and 2-byte data acquisition processing is performed (step Y107). As a result, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired from the special figure 1 game sequence branch table, and a subroutine call is made by the special figure 1 game process number (step Y108).

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, and the change start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special figure 1 variation display game are monitored. Figure 1
Setting information necessary for processing during fluctuations Special Figure 1 Normal processing (step Y109)
I do.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 1 are performed. 1 Perform the variable processing (step Y110).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command can be set according to the type of big hit, or each big hit type. Setting the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing, etc. Special Figure 1 Displaying processing (
Step Y111) is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y112).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or
Special figure 1 Performs the large winning opening residual ball processing (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end processing.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y115) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109). I do.

After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (
Step Y116), a lever solenoid control process (step Y) that controls the operation of the lever solenoid 38f by performing the symbol variation control process (step Y117) according to the special figure 1 display 51.
118) is performed to end the special figure 1 game processing. This special figure 1 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
20 and 21 show the special figure 2 game processing (step X113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game process is basically the same process as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in the big hit, that is, in the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being the big hit (step). Y130). Then, when the big hit of the special figure 1 is in progress (step Y130; Y).
To step Y133. In addition, when the big hit of the special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y1).
30; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y131) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y132) is performed.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set the large winning opening count command to be sent to the production control device 300 based on the winning to the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when the specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. Process. In the special figure 2 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the specific area is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operating area). Performs the process of setting the area passage flag. Based on the fact that this specific area passage flag is set, a process for generating a special gaming state is performed.

Next, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y133), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). And special figure 2
If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y153. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. (Step Y135).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y136), and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is extended to the special figure 2 game processing timer area. The variable timer value (for example, 60,000 msec) is saved (step Y137), and the process proceeds to step Y153.
In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal gaming state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at one time even if the upper limit value is set as the initial value of the timer. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the time is measured for a specified time (for example, 60,000 msec).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), first, in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number, the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to is first made. Is prepared in the register (step Y138), the special figure 2 game processing number is loaded and prepared (step Y139), and 2-byte data acquisition processing is performed (step Y140). As a result, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is acquired using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table, and the subroutine call is performed by the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y141).

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variation display game are monitored. Figure 2
Special Figure 2 Normal processing (step Y142) to set information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations
I do.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step Y143).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command can be set according to the type of big hit, or each big hit type. Setting the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing, etc. Special Figure 2 Displaying processing (
Step Y144) is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y145).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or
Special figure 2 The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y147) for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs is set, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. Processing during small hit fanfare (step Y1) to set necessary information for
49).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y150) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. conduct.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. Small hit remaining ball processing (step Y151) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (
Step Y153), a lever solenoid control process (step Y) that controls the operation of the lever solenoid 38f by performing the symbol variation control process (step Y154) according to the special figure 2 display 52.
155) is performed to end the special figure 2 game processing. This special figure 2 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing. The corresponding processing will be explained in parallel in.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 22 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start the change is not between the stop of the change of the special figure 2 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 1 is not variable startable (step Y201; N), "0" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y216), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area. (Step Y217), Special Figure 1 The normal processing is completed. Further, when the special figure 1 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202).
If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (step Y202; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and the effect command setting process (step Y20) is prepared.
4) is performed to set the left-handed instruction notification flag (step Y205). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the specific game state ends, so that the left-handed instruction notification is performed when the normal game state is entered.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206), and if the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Further, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and an effect command setting process (step Y2) is prepared.
08) is performed. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) for setting the information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and the decorative special figure 1 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y210). ), The effect command setting process (step Y211) is performed.
At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared. After that, the remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step Y212), and the effect command setting process (step Y213) is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y21).
4). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure fluctuation display game, and is 0 to 5.
Is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special gaming state which is a special gaming state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates that there is a second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y215) is performed, and the special figure 1 normal process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Normal processing]
FIG. 23 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y142) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start the change is not between the stop of the change of the special figure 1 change display game, which is a big hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 2 is not variable startable (step Y221; N), "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y238), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. (Step Y239), Special Figure 2 The normal processing is completed. Further, when the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222).

Then, when the number of reserved figures 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and an effect command setting process (step Y224) is performed. .. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) for setting the information related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step Y226). ), The effect command setting process (step Y227) is performed. The process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (step Y226).
At the time of performing, the special figure 2 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number -1 from the current special figure 2 hold number is performed. Are preparing. After that, the remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step Y228), and the effect command setting process (step Y229) is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y23).
0). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.
Is set. After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y231) is performed, and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222; Y), the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0.
(Step Y232). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (step Y233). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y234), and when it has not been started (step Y234; N), it is determined.
Performs processing related to setting the customer waiting state. Further, when the number of pending special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y).
232; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y233; Y) or when the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y234; Y), the process proceeds to step Y238.

In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demo flag area is set (step Y235), the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236), and the effect is produced. The command setting process (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses the information on the gaming state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate effect. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change in the game state is transmitted. You will be able to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the fluctuation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). As a result, the effect control device 30
At 0, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state.

In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game starts, even if the effect control device 300 is restarted, the effect according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. It becomes possible to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the game state to be transmitted. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the effect control device 300 to return to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 24A shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y2) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process.
09) is shown. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. In this special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process is set (step Y241). Then R
Prepare by loading random numbers from the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for hold number 1) of WM (step Y242), and clear 0 in the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for hold number 1) (step). Y
243), Fall lottery process (step Y24) to draw a lottery for the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state.
4) is performed. It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting the missed information or the jackpot information as the result information of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. The symbol setting process (step Y246) is performed. Then, the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y24) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern.
7) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (step Y248).

After that, the special figure 1 for setting the fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.
The variation pattern setting process (step Y249) is performed, the variation start information setting process (step Y250) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and the time reduction variation number update process (step Y251) is performed. .. Next, "1" related to the special figure 1 changing process is set as the process number (step Y252), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y253).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y254), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y256), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area.
Save the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer (step Y257).
), The initial value (here, "0" indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 1 (step Y258), and the change start process of the special figure 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 24 (b) shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y2) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process.
25) was shown. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. In this special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process is set (step Y261). Then R
Prepare by loading random numbers from the special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for hold number 1) of WM (step Y262), and clear 0 in the special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for hold number 1) (step). Y
263), fall lottery processing (step Y26) to draw a lottery for the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state.
4) is performed. It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting the missed information, the jackpot information, or the small hit information is performed as the result information of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. Special figure 2 Stop symbol setting process (step Y266) is performed. Then, in order to perform the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern, and to refer to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of FIG. 2 is set, is prepared (step Y268).

After that, the special figure 2 which sets the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.
The variation pattern setting process (step Y269) is performed, the variation start information setting process (step Y270) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and the time reduction variation start update process (step Y271) is performed. .. Next, "1" related to the special figure 2 changing process is set as the process number (step Y272), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y273).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y274), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y276), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area.
Save the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer (step Y277).
), The initial value (here, "0" indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 2 (step Y278), and the change start process of the special figure 2 is terminated.

In addition, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. This makes it possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value, such as selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the probability set value or making the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern different according to the probability set value.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 25 shows a fall lottery process (steps Y244 and Y264) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 change start process. In this fall lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step Y581), and if it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y581; N), the fall lottery process is terminated. In addition, when the special figure is in high probability (step Y581; Y).
In, it is determined whether the value of the target fall lottery random number is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582).
). It should be noted that winning the fall lottery means that the fall lottery random number matches the fall lottery determination value. The fall lottery judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the fall lottery random number is equal to or higher than the fall lottery lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the fall lottery judgment value, and is the upper limit value of the fall lottery judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, it is determined that the fall lottery has been won.

If the value of the fall lottery random number is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; Y), that is, if the fall lottery is not won, the fall lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the fall lottery random number is not less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; N), it is determined whether the value of the target fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583).
If the value of the fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583; Y), that is, if the fall lottery is not won, the fall lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the fall lottery random number is not larger than the fall lottery upper limit judgment value (
Step X583; N), that is, when the fall lottery is won, the process for shifting to the low probability state is performed.

In the process for shifting to the low probability state, first, the signal relating to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to ON, and the big hit 4 signal is set to OFF. Next, the signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is O.
FF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal OFF,
Special symbol 2 Set the fluctuation time shortening status signal to OFF.
Then, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y5).
86), the number without time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step Y587). After that, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and the fall lottery process is completed. As a result, it becomes a low-probability state and a state without normal electric support, and shifts to a normal game state. Information on the end of the high-probability state and the end of the general electric support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 3
In 00, processing such as changing the effect mode is performed based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 26A shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step Y282), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y282). Step Y283).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y284), and when it is a jackpot (step Y284; Y).
Ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not made a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y284; N), a big hit determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is a jackpot (step Y286; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y281 (step). Y287), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is not a jackpot (
In step Y286; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 26B shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, RWM's special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number)
Load and prepare the jackpot random number from (step Y293), and special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (step Y293).
Clear 0 (for 1 hold number) (step Y294).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y295), and when it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y).
To step Y299. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not made a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.
Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y292 (step). Y298), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), it is determined whether the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit according to whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. Save (step Y301) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (
In step Y300; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 27 shows the jackpot determination process (steps Y285, Y296) in the above-mentioned jackpot flag 1 setting process and jackpot flag 2 setting process. In this jackpot judgment process, first
The lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N).
), It is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step Y313).

Then, when the special figure is in high probability (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y314), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step Y316). Further, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y315), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit determination. Determine if it is greater than the value (
Step Y316).

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y31).
6; N), that is, in the case of a big hit, a big hit is set as a determination result (step Y).
318), the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 28 shows a small hit determination process (step Y29) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 2 setting process.
9) was shown. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target large hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Further, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y321; N).
Step Y322).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y323), and the small hit determination process is terminated. Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322; N), that is, when it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y324), and the small hit determination process is performed. finish.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 29 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
246) was shown. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1
Load the jackpot symbol random number from the jackpot symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) (step Y3)
32). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y333).
Step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. It should be noted that the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y335).
Step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure display (here, special figure 1 display 51).
This is for setting the stop symbol at the display device 41 and the stop symbol at the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the number of special figure 1 rounds. Save in the upper limit information area (step Y338), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special drawing 1 large winning opening opening information area (step Y339), and move to step Y340. .. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is set in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Next, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y340). As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y341) is performed. As a result, the decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343), and the special figure 1 Ends the stop symbol setting process.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 30 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
266) was shown. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step Y361), and when it is a jackpot (step Y3).
In 61; Y), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y362). Next, set the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table (step Y).
363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process.
It should be noted that the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y365).
Step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure display (here, special figure 2 display 52).
This is for setting the stop symbol at the display device 41 and the stop symbol at the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), and the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired to obtain the number of special figure 2 rounds. Save in the upper limit information area (step Y368), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, save it in the special drawing 2 large winning opening opening information area (step Y369), and move to step Y370. .. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and when it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number. Load the small hit symbol random number from the storage area (for 1 hold number) (step Y37)
6). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y377), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y378). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y).
379), the process proceeds to step Y370.

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y380), and the miss stop symbol pattern is set as a special figure. 2 Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Next, the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y370). As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. After that, the effect command setting process (step Y371) is performed. As a result, the decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372).
, Special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y373), special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y374), special figure 2 FIG. 2 The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
Based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means, the game control device 100 starts the first variation display game with the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). It is the first decision-making tool that can be decided before. In addition, the game control device 100
Based on the second start storage stored in the second start storage means, the result of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) and the variation mode information can be determined before the start of the second variation display game. Make a possible second decision. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

From the above, the starting winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win, and the normal variable winning device 37 is the game ball fired on the other side of the game area 32. Is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and the second determination is made in the normal state (normal game state). The variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the second variable display game by the means is longer than the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the first variable display game by the first determination means. Become.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game. Examples include variable commands that contain information about patterns. By transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing by the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 forms the first variable display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game processing.
Further, the game control device 100 serves as a second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the fluctuation time for each of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game according to the start of the fluctuation display game, and the measurement time has elapsed. It serves as a measurement means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

In the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, a long variation with a very long variation time is set, but in this case, the information about the variation time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the variation time is long variation. You may want to send a command that only indicates that. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply display the fluctuation, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command of long variation.
The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, the stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the variation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the variation display based on the reception of the stop command. To do so. By doing so, the effect control device 300
It is possible to reduce the burden of control in.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 31 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y24) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
7) was shown. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), and the first half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern,
The second half offset data is acquired (step Y402), and the special figure 1 jackpot, that is, the special figure 1
It is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot stop symbol pattern (step Y403).
In the case of a special figure 1 big hit (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y403; N), the special figure 1 hold number is added to the first half offset data to convert the value (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y405).
), End the special figure 1 information setting process. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.
In this way, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 hold number only in the first half fluctuation pattern in the case of a miss, and in the case of a big hit, consider the special figure 1 hold number. The fluctuation pattern is determined without.

[Special figure 2 information setting process]
FIG. 32 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y26) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
7) was shown. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal gaming state) (step Y421). Special figure Low probability & No time saving If not in the middle (
In step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not the time reduction final variation is performed (step Y427).
.. Here, the special figure 2 variable display game to be started from now on is 100 from the end of the special gaming state.
In the case of the special figure fluctuation display game of the number of times (number of times of support), it is determined that the final fluctuation is shortened in time.

Then, in the case of the time reduction final variation (step Y427; Y), step Y42
Move to 8. If the time is not the final variation (step Y427; N), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired. (Step Y424),
The process proceeds to step Y425.

On the other hand, when the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether the final variation has a high probability (step Y427). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability.
Then, in the case of a high-probability final variation (step Y427; Y), the first half offset data and the second half offset data for the final variation are set (step Y428), and step Y
Move to 425.
Further, when it is not a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y427; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y429). And when it is not a special figure 2 big hit (step Y42)
In 9; N), the first half offset data for the low probability special figure 2 miss / small hit is set (step Y430), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set (step Y432).
), The process proceeds to step Y425.

Further, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y431), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. (Step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used later for selecting a fluctuation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y426).
), End the special figure 2 information setting process. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group.
As described above, in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the number of reserved special figures 2.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 33 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y249) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special map fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step Y451), the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is performed. The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the holding number 1) of FIG. 1 (step Y453).
Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y454), and when the special figure 1 is off (step Y454; Y), 2
Byte distribution processing (step Y455) is performed. If the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), the distribution process (step Y456) is performed.

In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the hit type and the missed type. Specifically, the size for hitting is 1 byte size, and the size for losing is 2 bytes. Since the rate of occurrence of hits is lower than the rate of occurrence of loss and even one byte is sufficient, the size of hits is one byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and in order to enable a wider variety of production, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 1. And prepare (step Y458). Next, a distribution process (step Y459) is performed, and the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (step Y460). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variable selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (
Step Y463), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the holding number 1) of the special figure 1 (step Y464).
After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y466), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step Y471), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of hold 1) in FIG. 2 (step Y).
473).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y474), and when the special figure 2 is off (step Y474; Y), 2
Byte distribution processing (step Y475) is performed. If the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y474; N), the distribution process (step Y476) is performed.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 2. And prepare (step Y478). Next, a distribution process (step Y479) is performed, and the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (step Y480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y482). Then, the address of the first half variable selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (
Step Y483), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 2 (step Y484).
After that, the distribution process (step Y485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y486), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is set.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 35 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y250, Y270) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y551). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y552), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y553). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y554), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y555). Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step Y556), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y5).
57).

In the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, the above added value is the specified time (here, 60,000 m).
The remainder time (seconds) excluding the time that can be timed using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the time is performed.
(Time less than 60,000 msec) is calculated as an additional value.

After that, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558), and if the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y558; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether or not the long variation of the special figure 2 has started (step Y559). The long variation is a variation pattern set in the normal gaming state of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

Then, when it is not the start of the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 (step Y559; N), 0 is set as the special figure 2.
Save in the repeat count area of the game processing timer (step Y560). In addition, special figure 2
In the case of the start of the long fluctuation of (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repeat count region of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

After that, a variable command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variable number is prepared (step Y562).
, The variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the latter half variation number is prepared (step Y563), and the effect command setting process (step Y564) is performed. Next, the number of pending targets is updated by -1 (step Y566), the contents of the target random number storage area are shifted (step Y566), the free area after the shift is cleared (step Y567), and the fluctuation start information is set. End the process.

In the present embodiment, the number of repetitions is set for the length variation of the special figure 2 in order to vary the time that is not enough for the 2-byte timer. In the fluctuation start information setting process, 600 is added as an addition result.
The timer for 00msec, the number of repetitions of 9 is saved, the timer is subtracted by the timer interrupt processing, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 and the game processing timer is 60000m.
Set the seconds. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation in Special Figure 2 is 10 minutes (= 60,000 ms ×).
10). Since the timer interrupt cycle is 4 msec, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, it can be expressed by multiplying by 60 seconds.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 36 shows the time-reduced fluctuation number update processing (steps Y251 and Y271) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this time reduction fluctuation frequency update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in the high probability (during the high probability state) (step Y571), and when the special figure is in the high probability (step Y571; Y), the time is reached. The shortened fluctuation count update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure is not in high probability (step Y571; N), it is determined whether the special figure time is shortened (step Y572). Then, when the special time is not shortened (step Y572; N).
) Ends the time reduction variation number update process. Further, when the special figure time reduction is in progress (step Y572; Y), the time reduction variation number is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the time reduction variation number is "0" (step Y574). ..

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A754; N), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated. Further, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step Y57).
4; In Y), a signal relating to the end of the time saving state (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575), and a signal relating to the end of the time saving state (for example, the signal indicating the end of the time saving state) is saved.
Special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal is turned off,
Normal symbol 1 Turn off the fluctuation time shortening state signal, turn off the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal)
Is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y577), and the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578).
), Save the normal map time reduction flag in the normal map game mode flag area (step Y579).
), Ends the time reduction fluctuation count update process.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y110) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
showed that. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y621). Then, load the command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and prepare (
Step Y622) and the effect command setting process (step Y623) are performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and the effect command setting process (step Y625) is performed. Since the gaming machine of the present embodiment may be forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the fluctuation is stopped. .. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In this embodiment, for example, 600 in the case of an outlier.
The display time is set to m seconds, or 2000 m seconds in the case of a big hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y627). If it is out of the special figure 1 (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y642. Further, when the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y627;
N), that is, in the case of a big hit, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y639. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is being performed (step Y629). That is, in this case, the special figure 2 being executed is based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit.
This is a case where the variable display game is forcibly stopped due to a missed result. Note that even if the variable display game in Special Figure 2 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of the special figure 2 is being performed (step Y639; Y), the process proceeds to step Y631. Further, when the special figure 2 display is not being processed (step Y629; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y630), and the special figure 1 is set as the display time of the special figure 2. Display time + Display time of 4 msec is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 ends at the same time. Even if the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. This resetting extends the stop display time, but may shorten it in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decorative special figure 2 off-design command is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and the effect command setting process (step Y635) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y636), the effect command setting process (step Y638) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y638) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y639), and the information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area. (Step Y640), the information is loaded from the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y641). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y643) is performed to perform the special figure 1 stop symbol area.
Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y143) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
showed that. In this special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y651). Then, load the command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and prepare (
Step Y652) and the effect command setting process (step Y653) are performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and the effect command setting process (step Y655) is performed. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In the present embodiment, for example, a display time of 600 msec in the case of a miss, 600 msec in the case of a big hit, and 136 msec in the case of a small hit is set.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y657). If it is out of the special figure 2 (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. In addition, when the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y657;
N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the process proceeds to step Y673. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). Special figure 2 When it is not a big hit (step Y65)
9; N), that is, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the decorative special figure 1 interruption command is prepared (step Y671). ), Perform the effect command setting process (step Y672), and step Y673.
Move to.

That is, in this case, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit. It should be noted that even if the variable display game of Special Figure 1 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is restarted at the end of the special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display processing is in progress (step Y660). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result. Note that even if the variable display game in Special Figure 1 has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of Special Figure 1 is in progress (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. Further, when the special figure 1 display is not being processed (step Y660; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the special figure 2 is set as the display time of the special figure 2. Display time + Display time of 4 msec is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of the special figure 2 + the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 1, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 ends at the same time. Even if the special figure 1 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started. This resetting extends the stop display time, but may shorten it in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 off-design command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and the effect command setting process (step Y666) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), the effect command setting process (step Y668) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) is performed.

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and is the special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Determine (step Y674). In the case of a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (
Step Y674; N), that is, in the case of a big hit, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y675).
Special figure 2 Load information from the large winning opening opening information area and save it in the large winning opening opening information area (
Step Y676). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678) is performed to perform the special figure 2 stop symbol area. Ends the process being displayed.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
In FIG. 39, the process during display of the special figure 1 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process (step Y111).
showed that. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y7).
51), clear the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y752). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is the big hit information (step Y753).
, When the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), a test signal regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the special symbol is turned on). (1 signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754).
..

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y755), and the effect command setting process (step Y756) is prepared.
I do. After that, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and an effect command setting process (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of this embodiment
Two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 100msec) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information
Is set (step Y760), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y762), and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y763). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y764) is performed to perform the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing.
Special figure 1 Displaying processing ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, the big hit flag 1
If it is out-of-order information, it is determined whether it is a high-probability final variation (step Y765), and if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y765; N), it is determined whether it is a time-reduced final variation (step Y766). .. Here, when the fall lottery for the running special figure 1 variation display game is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special gaming state, it is determined that the final variation is shortened.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y765; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. Further, in the case of a high-probability final variation (step Y765; Y) or a time-reduced final variation (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and an effect command is provided. Perform the setting process (step Y768). Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y769), the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y770), and the small hit of the special figure 2 is in progress, that is, Special Figure 2 It is determined whether or not the player is in a special gaming state to be executed based on the result of the variable display game being a small hit (step Y771).

If the small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y771; Y), the process proceeds to step Y774. On the other hand, when the small hit in FIG. 2 is not in progress (step Y771; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y773). As a result, the first game status display unit 5
6 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed. After that, the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y774), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775), and the special figure 1 Ends the process being displayed.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
40 and 41 show the process during display of the special figure 2 (step Y144) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. The special figure 2 display process is the same process as the special figure 1 display process described above for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is flagged. Clear two areas (step Y812).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 area in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is the big hit information (step Y815), and when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variation display game. The test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y817), and the effect command setting process (step Y818) is performed.
I do. After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and the effect command setting process (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of this embodiment
Two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 100msec) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information
Is set (step Y822), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y824), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y825). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y826) is performed to perform the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing.
Special figure 2 Displaying processing ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, the big hit flag 2
If the information is out of order, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y8).
In 27; Y), it is determined whether it is a high-probability final variation (step Y828), and when it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y828; N), it is determined whether it is a time-reduced final variation (step Y829). Here, when the fall lottery for the running special figure 2 variation display game is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special gaming state, it is determined that the final variation is shortened.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y828; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y829; N), the process proceeds to step Y834. Further, in the case of a high-probability final variation (step Y828; Y) or a time-reduced final variation (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and an effect command is provided. Perform the setting process (step Y831). Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y832), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the player is not aware of the occurrence of the small hit. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, the command is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y834), and the command is prepared.
The effect command setting process (step Y835) is performed. Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), an effect command setting process (step Y837) is performed, and a signal related to a right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838).
). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing right-handed strike is made.
After that, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the lower prize opening is cleared (step Y840), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the flag area of the illegal monitoring period of the lower winning opening (step Y841), and the special figure 2
Small hit fanfare processing During transition setting processing (step Y857) is performed, and the processing during display of special figure 2 is terminated.

Further, when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether it is a high-probability final variation (step Y843), and when it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y84).
In 3; N), it is determined whether or not the time is the final variation (step Y844). Here, when the fall lottery for the running special figure 2 variation display game is won, it is determined that the final variation has a high probability. In addition, the running special figure 2 variable display game has been played 100 times since the end of the special game state (
(Number of times of support) In the case of the special figure fluctuation display game of the eye, it is determined that the time is shortened and the final fluctuation is made.

Then, if it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y843; N) and if it is not a time-reduced final variation (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. Further, in the case of a high-probability final variation (step Y843; Y) or a time-reduced final variation (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and an effect command is provided. Perform the setting process (step Y846). Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y847), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed. After that, the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y850), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851), and the special figure 2 is Ends the process being displayed.

That is, based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result, the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the conditional device. A second special game generating means for generating a second special gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened without the operation of the conditional device based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result. Eggplant.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
42 and 43 show fanfare / interval processing (steps Y112, Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y939), and if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y939; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y939; Y), it is determined whether it is the first round (step Y940).

If it is not the first round (step Y940; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, in the case of the first round (step Y940; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y941). Here, in the present embodiment, the special gaming state is started by the game ball passing through the normal drawing start gate 34 after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure variation display game. There is. It should be noted that the start condition of the special game state may be satisfied by the game ball passing through a gate provided separately from the normal drawing start gate 34.

If the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y941; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 (step Y941; Y), the round number upper limit value table is prepared (step Y942), and the round number upper limit value information is loaded and prepared. (Step Y943),
Performs 2-byte data acquisition processing (step Y944). The upper limit of the number of rounds (10 in the case of this embodiment) acquired in this way is saved in the upper limit of the number of rounds (step Y94).
5). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the acquired round number upper limit value information is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

Next, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the upper prize opening is cleared (step Y947), and the flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the area of the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y948). After that, the on-output data of the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y950).
.. Then, the large winning opening opening information and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y951), and the effect command setting process (step Y952) is performed.

Next, the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y954), and the jackpot prize is won. The large winning opening time corresponding to the opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y955). As the initial value of the processing control pointer during the big hit, 0 is set when opening and closing are repeated in one round. In this embodiment, long opening with V corresponds. In addition, when opening once in one round, the jackpot operation end value (
In the case of this embodiment, 2) is set. The initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

Next, it is determined whether it is a lever solenoid operation round (step Y956). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only the first specific round. Then, in the case of the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N),
The stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

After that, 4 is set as the processing number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y960). Then, in the case of a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y960;
In Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y961), and the large winning opening opening time is saved in the special drawing 1 game processing timer area (step Y962). on the other hand,
If it is not the big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y960; N), that is, if it is the big hit of the special figure 2, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y963), and the big winning opening opening time is set. Special figure 2 Saving in the game processing timer area (step Y964).

Then, the signal related to the opening start of the upper prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (
Step Y965). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is set to ON. Next, the first
In order to open the opening / closing member of the special variable winning device 38, the upper winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y966), and the number of winning entries to the large winning opening is counted. (Step Y967) to end the fanfare / interval processing.

In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the special gaming state based on the big hit (first special gaming state), only the upper big winning opening (first special variable device 38) is open and small. In the special gaming state based on the hit (second special gaming state), only the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing mode in the first special gaming state may be such that the upper prize opening is opened in the first round and the lower prize opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y11) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
5) was shown. In this special figure 1 big hit end process, first, a subroutine call is made based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1101). If the time reduction determination data has no time reduction in step Y1101, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step Y1102) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has time reduction in step Y1101, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1102) is performed. Step Y1103) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1104). In the present embodiment, when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operation area), the specific area passage flag is set.
When this specific area passage flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passage information. If there is no specific area passage information (step Y1104; N), the process proceeds to step Y1106. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1104; Y), the jackpot end setting process 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1106), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variation operation area) in the special gaming state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment). (Step Y1107).

If the passage is not irregular in a specific region (step Y1107; N), step Y1
Move to 109. On the other hand, when the passage is irregular in a specific region (step Y1107;
In Y), the irregular probability change information is added to the probability information command (step Y1108).
), The effect command setting process (step Y1109) is performed. By the process of step Y1109, the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands containing the effect mode information in any of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "low probability / no time saving". Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the probability variation operation region, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" related to the special figure 1 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1110), and the processing number is set.
The processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1111). Next, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112).
Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). here,
Condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special symbol 1 per signal and special symbol 2
Set the hit signal to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114), and the light is turned off.
Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (step Y1)
115), clear the special figure status area (step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set. And special figure 2 game wait time value (
For example, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is terminated.

By performing this special figure 1 big hit end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the processing to start the special figure variation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variation display game. Can be started earlier. Therefore, in step Y1117, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area.
The start process of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, the second variable display game execution control means is the first until the game control device 100 can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. 2 Variable display A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the game from being executed.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y14) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
8) was shown. The special figure 2 big hit end process is the step Y110 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit process.
It is the same process except that 9 is not performed. In this special figure 2 big hit end process, first, a subroutine call is made based on the time reduction determination data (step Y1131). Step Y113
If there is no time reduction in the time reduction determination data in 1, the jackpot end setting process 1 (step Y1)
132) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has a time reduction in step Y1131, the jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1133) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1134), and if there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, when there is information passing through a specific area (step Y1134; Y), the jackpot end setting process 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variation operation area) in the special gaming state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the passage is irregular in the specific region, which is the inflow of the (step Y1137).

If the passage is not irregular in a specific area (step Y1137; N), step Y1
Move to 139. On the other hand, when the passage is irregular in a specific area (step Y1137;
In Y), add irregular probability change information to the probability information command (step Y1138).
), The effect command setting process (step Y1139) is performed. By the process of step Y1139, the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands containing the effect mode information in any of "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", and "low probability / no time saving". Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the probability variation operation region, irregular probability variation information is added.

Next, "0" related to the special figure 2 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1140), and the processing number is set.
The processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1141). Next, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143).
Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). here,
Condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special symbol 1 per signal and special symbol 2
Set the hit signal to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144), and the light is turned off.
Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (step Y11)
45), the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1146), and the special figure 2 big hit end process is completed. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed is set.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 46A shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1102, 1132) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, the signal relating to the start without time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to OFF. At this point, only the data is set and no output is made.

Next, the signal relating to the start without time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, the special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, the normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, and the ordinary electric accessory. 1 Set the open extension status signal to OFF.
After that, the number without time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step Y1153), and the game is saved.
Save the normal time reduction flag in the normal game mode flag area (step Y1154).
.. Next, the special figure low probability and no time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and the time reduction fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time reduction state is set to 0. Clear (step Y1156).

Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1).
157). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed. After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1159), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated. By this process, it becomes a normal game state.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 46B shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1103, 1133) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal related to the start of the time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1).
161). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal relating to the start with a time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, the special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, the normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, and the ordinary electric accessory. 1 Set the open extension status signal to ON.
After that, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step Y1163), and the game is saved.
Save the flag with the normal time reduction in the normal figure game mode flag area (step Y1164).
.. Next, the special figure low probability and the time saving flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and the initial time saving fluctuation number area for managing the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is initially set. Save the value (step Y1166). In the case of this embodiment, since the number of times of support is 100, 100 is saved as an initial value in step Y1166.

Then, the probability information command (time reduction) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1167), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By this processing, it becomes the second specific game state with a low probability of special figure. In the case of this embodiment, the right-handed mode is used during the time saving state.
Since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
FIG. 47 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (steps Y1105 and Y1135) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this jackpot end setting process 3, first, the signal relating to the start of the special figure time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1).
171). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, save the signal related to the start with high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (
Step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON. After that, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step Y1173).
), Save the special figure high probability and time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1).
175). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the game status display number 2
The number in the right-handed state is saved in the area (step Y1176). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing right-handed strike is made. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1177), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is terminated. This process results in a high probability state. That is, by executing the big hit end setting process 3 after the big hit end setting process 1, the first specific game state is set.
By executing the jackpot end setting process 3 after the jackpot end setting process 2, the second with a high probability of special figure
It becomes a specific game state.
By the above processing, it becomes possible to set a specific gaming state which is a high probability state after the end of the first special gaming state. That is, the game control device 100 has a specific game state (first specific game state ST2, special figure high probability second specific game state ST3) in which the probability that the result of the special variation display game becomes a special result is higher than the normal state. Is a means for generating a specific game state that can generate.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
FIG. 48 shows the small hit fanfare middle process (step Y149) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this small hit fanfare middle process, first, a small hit opening command for opening the lower prize opening is prepared (step Y1201), and an effect command setting process (step Y1202) is performed. Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1203), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1204).
).

Next, the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation (special electric accessory 2 operating signal is turned ON) is a test signal. Save to the output data area (step Y1206). and,
Save the lower prize opening on-data in the grand prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y12)
07), the large winning opening count area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1208), and the processing during the small hit fanfare is completed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y15) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
2) was shown. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1335). Step Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area
The special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (during a normal game state) (step Y133).
7) In the case of low probability of special figure & no time reduction (step Y1337; N), step Y
Move to 1340. In addition, when the special figure has a low probability and there is no time reduction (step Y1337;
In Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1338). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1340).

Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N),
The special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (step Y1340; Y).
In), a decorative special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1341), and an effect command setting process (step Y1342) is performed. After that, clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area (
Step Y1343), special figure 2 small hit end processing is completed. As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device 100 is the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 1).
When the execution control of one of the variable display game execution control means is performed by one of the variable display game execution control means (00) and the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100).
When the other variable display game whose execution is controlled by the other variable display game execution control means has a special result, one variable display game is interrupted and the special gaming state based on the other variable display game is changed. It is a restart control means that can execute restart control to restart one of the variable display games that was interrupted after the game was finished.

[Public game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (step X114) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the Fuzu game process, first, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the Fuden winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. Perform the monitoring process (step B2). Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been timed up, it is referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. Prepare the normal game sequence branch table in the register (
Step B5), the normal figure game processing number is loaded and prepared (step B6), and 2-byte data acquisition processing is performed (step B7). As a result, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the game process number of the game is acquired from the branch table of the game sequence of the game, and a subroutine call is made using the game process number of the game (step B8).

In step B8, when the normal map game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting and the effect setting of the normal map fluctuation display game are set, and the normal map is changing. Performs normal processing (step B9) for setting information necessary for processing.
Further, in step B8, when the normal map game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display processing is performed.

Further, in step B8, when the normal map game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal power release time is set according to whether or not the time is shortened. In addition, the normal map display processing (step B11) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map hitting process is performed.
Further, in step B8, when the normal map game processing number is "3", the normal map hitting process is performed, or the information necessary for performing the normal drawing remaining ball processing is set. The process (step B12) is performed.

Further, in step B8, when the normal figure game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per end processing is performed.
Further, in step B8, when the normal figure game processing number is "5", the normal figure per end process (step B14) for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B15), the symbol fluctuation control process (step) related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53. B16) is performed to end the normal map game processing.
On the other hand, in step B4, the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4;
N), that is, when it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to the process of step B15, and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not the hit information (step B503; N), "0" related to the normal processing of the normal figure is set as the processing number (step B520), and the processing number is saved in the normal drawing game processing number area (step). B521). After that, the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (step B522), and the process of displaying the normal map is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hit processing setting table is prepared (step B504), and the normal figure stop symbol information is loaded and prepared (step B505), and 2 bytes are prepared. Data acquisition processing is performed (step B506). As a result, the hit start pointer value and the hit end pointer value corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information are acquired from the hit processing setting table.

Then, the acquired value of the hit start pointer (for example, "0" or "5") is saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B507), and the value of the acquired hit end pointer (for example, "4") is saved. Or "7") is saved in the end pointer area per normal figure (step B50).
8). Next, the normal power release time table is prepared (step B509), the normal figure stop symbol information is loaded and prepared (step B510), and the 2-byte data acquisition process is performed (step B511). As a result, the normal power opening time corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired from the normal power opening time table. Then, the acquired public power opening time (for example, 1700 ms or 260)
0 ms) is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B512).

Next, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the processing during normal drawing (step B).
513), the processing number is saved in the normal figure game processing number area (step B514).
After that, a signal relating to the start of hitting the solenoid fluctuation display game (for example, turning on the signal during operation of the normal symbol 1) and a signal relating to the start of operating the solenoid (for example, turning on the signal during operation of the solenoid electric accessory 1) are set as test signals. The on-data is saved in the output data area of the solenoid solenoid (step B516) in order to save the data in the output data area (step B515) and output the signal for driving (on) the solenoid solenoid.

Further, the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B517), and the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. Clear the information in the illegal winning number area (step B518). Then, a flag (a flag outside the fraud monitoring period) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B519), and the processing during display of the normal map is terminated.

[2-byte data acquisition process]
In FIG. 52, 2-byte data acquisition processing (steps Y107, Y140, Y944, B7) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing, special figure 2 game processing, fanfare / interval processing, normal map game processing, and normal map display processing is shown. , B506, B511). In this 2-byte data acquisition process, first, the value of the register input as the pointer is doubled (step Y971), and the calculated value is added to the register input as the reference address (step Y).
972). Then, 2 bytes of data are acquired from the added address (step Y97).
3) End the 2-byte data acquisition process.

[Design fluctuation control process]
FIG. 53 shows the symbol variation control processing (steps Y117, Y154, B16) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process, special figure 2 game process, and normal figure game process. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbol on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the normal symbol display unit 58. In this symbol variation control process, first, the address of the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (special figure 1, special figure 2 or normal figure) is acquired (step Y1401), and it is determined whether the symbol to be controlled is changing. Check (step Y1402)
..

Then, when the fluctuation control flag is fluctuating (step Y1403; Y), the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1404), and the blinking control timer related to the symbol to be controlled is acquired. An area is prepared (step Y1405), and a 1-byte subtraction process is performed to update the blinking control timer related to the symbol to be controlled by -1 (step Y140).
6), it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step Y140).
7).

If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step 1407; N), step Y1412
Move to. When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step 1407; Y), the initial value of the blinking control timer (here, 100 ms) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step Y1408), and the symbol to be controlled is controlled. Prepare the variable symbol number area according to (step Y1409), and prepare the variable symbol number upper limit determination value (common to special figures and normal figures) (step Y1).
410). Then, a 1-byte addition process is performed to update the variable symbol number related to the symbol to be controlled by +1 (step Y1411), and display data corresponding to the value in the variable symbol number region of the target is acquired (step Y1412). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1415), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not changing (step Y1403; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1413). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step Y1414).
), Save the acquired display data in the target segment area (step Y1415),
The symbol fluctuation control process is terminated. As a result, among the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the normal figure display unit 58, the special figure display or the normal figure display unit 58 to be controlled has the special figure or the normal figure corresponding to the symbol number. Will be displayed.

[1 byte subtraction process]
FIG. 54 shows a 1-byte subtraction process (step Y1406) in the above-mentioned symbol variation control process.
)showed that. In this 1-byte subtraction process, first, it is determined whether the content of the target area is 0 (step Y1421), and if it is 0 (step Y1421; Y), the 1-byte subtraction process is terminated. If it is not 0 (step Y1421; N), the content of the target area is changed to-.
Update 1 (step Y1422) and end the 1-byte subtraction process.

[1 byte addition process]
FIG. 55 shows a 1-byte addition process (step Y1411) in the above-mentioned symbol variation control process.
)showed that. In this 1-byte addition process, first, the content of the target area is loaded (step Y1431), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step Y1432), and it is determined whether the updated value is smaller than the upper limit determination value (step). Y1433).

When the update value is smaller than the upper limit determination value (step Y1433; Y), the update value is saved in the target area (step Y1435), and the 1-byte addition process is terminated. If the update value is not smaller than the upper limit determination value (step Y1433; N), 0 is set as the update value (step Y1434), and the update value is saved in the target area (step Y1435).
The 1-byte addition process is terminated.

[Direction command setting process]
Next, the details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X601), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step X602). When the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step X602; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step X601). If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step X602; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X603).

Next, the status of the serial transmission buffer for production is read (step X604),
It is determined whether the serial transmission buffer for production is full (step X605). When the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step X605; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step X604). If the serial transmission buffer for production is not full (step X605; N), the command data (ACTION).
) Is written in the effect serial transmission buffer (step X606), and the effect command setting process is terminated.

In the above example, the starting condition of the special gaming state is that the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 after the special result is derived, but as a modification, only the derivation of the special result is the special gaming state. It may be a starting condition. In this case, the processes of FIGS. 57 to 60 are performed.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Instead of the special figure 1 display process shown in FIG. 39, the special figure 1 display process shown in FIG. 57 is performed. In this process during display of special figure 1, when special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), FIG. 42
Steps Y942 to Y94 performed in the fanfare / interval processing shown in
Perform the process of 6. Further, in the process (step Y754) of saving the test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variation display game in the test signal output data area, the condition device operating signal is turned on and the special symbol 1 hit signal. In addition to turning on, the signal during operation of the accessory continuous actuator is turned on.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Instead of the special figure 1 display process shown in FIG. 40, the special figure 2 display process shown in FIG. 58 is performed. In this process during display of special figure 2, when special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), FIG. 42
Steps Y942 to Y94 performed in the fanfare / interval processing shown in
Perform the process of 6. Further, in the process (step Y816) of saving the test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variation display game in the test signal output data area, the condition device operating signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on. In addition to turning on, the signal during operation of the accessory continuous actuator is turned on.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing Transition setting processing]
In FIG. 59, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y764, Y826) in the special figure 1 display processing and the special figure 2 display processing shown in FIG. 57 are shown.
)showed that. In this fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, first, the signal relating to the start of the big hit (first special gaming state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, the big hit 1 signal output by the big hit or the small hit is set to ON.
Next, the signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time is turned off. The shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is set to OFF.

After that, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the number in the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode is used. A special low probability, no time saving flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

Then, the flag with no time saving for the normal figure is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step Y8).
76) Save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery. Save the probability information command (low probability) in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y877), and the special figure variation that can be executed in a time-saving state. Clear the time-reduced fluctuation count area for managing the number of times the display game is executed (step Y878). As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving operation state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal operation state are established.

Next, the jackpot information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y879), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the game state display number 2 area is in the right-handed state. Save the number (step Y881). After that, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the upper prize opening is cleared (step Y882), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y883), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing is performed. To finish.

In addition, the processing of steps Y871 to Y882 is also performed in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y764, Y826) in the special figure 1 display processing and the special figure 2 display processing shown in FIG. 39. There is.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Instead of the fanfare / in-interval processing shown in FIG. 42, the fanfare / in-interval processing shown in FIG. 60 is performed. In this fanfare / interval processing, the processing of steps Y940 to Y949 is not performed. These processes are performed in the processes of FIGS. 57 to 59.

Next, an example of the data structure of ROM 111B is shown in FIG.
The ROM 111B provided in the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is shown in FIG. 61 (
As shown in a), the program / data area where the program and fixed data are stored, the ROM comment area where arbitrary data such as the title and version of the program can be set, and the start address and timer allocation of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction. It has a vector table area in which a table for setting the start address of the embedded processing is stored, and an HW (hardware) parameter area in which parameters for setting the internal functions of the gaming microcomputer 111 in terms of hardware are stored. ing.

In the program / data area, as shown in FIG. 61A, a program area 111Ba in which various programs are stored, a first unused area 111Bb, and a data area 111Bc in which various fixed data are stored are stored in this order from the beginning. And a second unused area 111Bd are provided. Then, when the CPU 111A accesses the second unused area 111Bd, an illegal access reset is configured to occur.

As shown in FIG. 61B, the data area 111Bc stores the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table in which the upper limit judgment value table used for the jackpot judgment is stored, and the performance display in which the data related to the performance display is stored. Areas for various data such as the area A3 for various data are provided. Further, an unused area A2 for which access is prohibited is provided between the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table and the area A3 for displaying the performance in the data area 111Bc. And C
When the PU111A accesses the unused area A2, an illegal access reset is configured to occur.

The CPU 111A sets the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value in step X585 of the look-ahead jackpot determination process (FIG. 18) and step Y315 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 27). At that time, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is used as a pointer, and R
The upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is acquired from OM111B and set.
Further, the CPU 111A sets an upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value in step X584 of the look-ahead jackpot determination process (FIG. 18) and step Y314 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 27). At that time, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is used as a pointer, and the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is acquired and set from the ROM 111B.

In the look-ahead jackpot determination process and the jackpot determination process, the process of determining whether the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (range of 0 to 5 in this embodiment) is not performed. for that reason,
Even when the value in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, the data is acquired from the ROM 111B using the value (abnormal value) as a pointer. Therefore, for example, FIG.
As shown in 2, when the unused area A2 is not arranged immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table, that is, the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table and the area A3 for performance display are adjacent to each other. If this is the case, an accurate jackpot determination cannot be made, and there may be inconveniences such as a markedly easy jackpot or a significantly difficult jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62, when the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table and the area A3 for performance display are adjacent to each other, and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is acquired from the ROM 111B. In addition, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "5" (within the normal range), the upper limit determination corresponding to "setting 6" in the low probability is made by using the value as a pointer. You can get the value, that is, the exact data. On the other hand, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is "7".
When it is (outside the normal range), by using the value as a pointer, the data stored in the performance display area A3, that is, erroneous data is acquired. The same applies to the case of acquiring the upper limit determination value in high probability from ROM 111B.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the area A for the upper limit determination value table
Immediately after 1, the unused area A2 was placed. As a result, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, if an attempt is made to acquire the upper limit determination value from the ROM 111B using the value as a pointer, the unused area (access prohibited area) A2 is used. Since it will be accessed, an illegal access reset will occur. As a result, it is possible to initialize the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM and to notify the abnormality.

Specifically, when an illegal access reset occurs, the program is restarted and the main processing (FIGS. 9 and 10) is started. At that time, since the processing when a power failure occurs (steps X55 to X61) is not executed before the restart, the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is not the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 in the main processing after the restart. Is determined (step X)
16; N). At that time, the setting change operation (setting key switch 152 and R) is performed at the time of restart.
Since the operation of the AM initialization switch 112) is not performed, it is determined that both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the off state in the main process after the restart (step X21; N). Therefore, since the processing of steps X25 and X26 is executed, the setting change operation is requested, that is, the abnormality is notified. Then, due to this request (notification), the power of the gaming machine is turned on again while executing the setting change operation, so that the value in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is initialized ( Step X28).

As shown in FIG. 61 (c), the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table is the data area 1.
It may be placed at the end of 11Bc. In this case, even if the unused area A2 is not placed immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table, an illegal access reset occurs when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range. do. That is, when the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table is arranged at the end of the data area 111Bc, when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is out of the normal range, the value is used as a pointer and the upper limit is set from the ROM 111B. When trying to acquire the determination value, the second unused area (access prohibited area) 111Bd is accessed, so that an illegal access reset occurs.

From the above, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment has a control means (game control device 100 (CPU111A)) for controlling the game and a storage means (game) in which information necessary for controlling the game by the control means is stored. The storage area includes the control device 100 (ROM111B)) and is included in the area for the probability value table (area A1 for the upper limit determination value table) among the plurality of storage areas included in the storage means. The probability value assigned to the probability setting value corresponding to is stored, and the control means stores the probability setting value stored in the storage means (the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM) among the plurality of storage areas. Information (data) is acquired from the corresponding storage area, a game lottery (big hit determination) is performed using the information, and in the storage means, the information is not continuously stored in the area for the probability value table. Used area (unused area A2, second unused area 11)
1Bd) is configured to be arranged (see FIGS. 61 (b) and 61 (c)).
With this configuration, if the probability setting value (value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM) stored in the storage means is out of the normal range, the unused area (unused area A2, The second unused area 111Bd) will be accessed. That is, since the lottery itself is not executed when an accurate lottery result cannot be obtained, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the lottery is remarkably easy to win or the lottery is remarkably difficult to win.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 63 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 63, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the initial setting of the CPU is performed (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Then, the generation of display data is permitted (step C).
5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the hall setting mode processing that accepts the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal is performed (step C10), and the player setting mode that accepts the operation such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player. Processing is performed (step C11). Next, a random number update process (step C1) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game.
2) is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step C13) that analyzes commands from the game control device 100 and responds to them is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C14) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C15). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and finally the drawing data is set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C16). In this embodiment, a V blank interrupt (1/6) is created in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second).
When (0 seconds) is entered twice, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C16 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C16; N), the process of step C16 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C16 that it is the frame switching timing (step C16; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

After that, a sound control process (step C18) that controls the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step) that controls LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18. C19), a panel that performs a movable body control process (step C20) that controls the motor, solenoid, and reel 6 of the panel effect device 44, and controls the effect by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, and the like. The effect setting process (step C21) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 64 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of received commands (
Step C201), it is determined whether or not the number of commands received is not 0 (step C202).
.. Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Then, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
), The command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer.
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
Can be moved to make room. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to the process of step C204. Further, when it is determined that the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 65 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
To determine if the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C23).
4).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not the correct combination (step). C2
34; N) ends the received command analysis process.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (
In step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235).
In Y), a variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
In step C235; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). And MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command processing (step C239; Y) is performed.
Step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of the symbol-based command (
In step C239; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of one-shot commands such as a hold count command and an error command (step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of a single-shot command (step C24).
In 1; Y), a single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the one-shot command (
In step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol-based command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol-based command processing (step C2) is performed.
44) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is in the range of the look-ahead variable system command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N).
Ends the received command analysis process.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the start memory (holding) in which the special figure change display game has not been executed becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be displayed. It is a production such as performing a production display. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 66 shows variable command processing (step C2) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing.
36) was shown. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-mentioned symbol system command processing.

When this special figure type is undetermined (step C361; Y), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C361; N).
Step C362), it is determined whether the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C).
363).

If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variable command process is terminated. If the variable command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C3).
63; N) determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a missed symbol, a 16R jackpot symbol, a 10R jackpot symbol, and a small hit symbol. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, it is similar to the case where the deviation command (variation pattern command) is received but the symbol command of the 16R jackpot symbol is received. It means that the combination is inconsistent (combination of variable command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, the variation effect setting process for setting the information for performing the effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure change is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366).
). Here, "during special map change" means that the special figure is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (number of times of pre-reading execution) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command processing is terminated.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 67 shows the jackpot command process (step C) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process.
238) was shown. In this jackpot command process, first, it is determined whether the MODE is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). When the MODE is a fanfare (step C401; Y), a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare display image according to a big hit type and a small hit is performed (step C402), and the P machine state is set to the fanfare. The setting (step C403) is performed, and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state. Then, when the MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the round number display information and the like is performed (step C405), and the P machine state is set during the round (step C406). End the jackpot command processing.

If the MODE is not a round (step C404; N), it is determined whether the MODE is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to the interval between rounds. Then, when the MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), the interval effect setting process for setting the effect during the interval is performed (step C408), the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409), and the jackpot is hit. Terminates system command processing. If the MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to the ending after the end of the final round or a small hit end screen command at the end of the small hit.

When MODE is an ending (step C410; Y), an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect at the end of a big hit or a small hit is performed (step C4).
11), the P machine state is set during the ending (step C412), and the jackpot command processing is terminated. If MODE is not the ending (step C410; N),
MODE determines whether it is a count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a large winning opening count command based on winning a prize in the special variable winning device.

If MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the jackpot command processing is terminated. When the MODE is a count (step C413; Y), the count effect setting process (step C414) for setting the effect corresponding to the winning of the special variable winning device 38 is performed, and the jackpot command process is terminated.

<Setting suggestion production>
The effect control device 300 can store the setting history of the probability setting value in the FeRAM 323, and can execute the setting suggestion effect suggesting the past or present probability setting value based on the setting history.
When the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the game control device 100 transmits a command for recovery from a power failure (step X42) or a command for RAM initialization (step X46) to the effect control device 300. These commands include a probability setting information command (a command indicating the current probability setting value), and the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 receives, for example, the probability setting information command. Based on the command and the information from the RTC 338 (information indicating the current date and time), the current probability setting value and the current date (current date) are stored in association with each other in the setting history area of the FeRAM 323.
An upper limit (for example, 90 days) may be provided for the probability setting value that can be stored in the setting history area. In that case, for example, when the probability setting information command is received while the upper limit has been reached, the probability setting value corresponding to the oldest date is cleared and the probability setting value corresponding to the newest date (current date) is cleared. Is to be remembered.

When the probability setting information command is received multiple times on the same day, the CP of the effect control device 300
The U311 overwrites, for example, the probability setting value (probability setting value associated with the current date) corresponding to the stored current date in the setting history area of FeRAM323 with the latest probability setting value. Therefore, the probability setting value set at the end of the day remains as a history.
The probability setting value remaining in the setting history area is not limited to the probability setting value set at the end of the day and can be changed as appropriate. For example, even if the probability setting value has been set for the longest time of the day. It may be a probability set value set at a predetermined time point (for example, noon) of the day. In that case, for example, the latest probability setting value is stored as the probability setting value corresponding to the current day until the predetermined timing of the day (for example, when the power is cut off), and when the predetermined timing is reached, the current day is supported. The corresponding probability setting value (that is, the probability setting value set for the longest time of the day, the probability setting value set at a predetermined time point of the day, etc.) is stored as the probability setting value to be performed.

Further, the effect control device 300 notifies that the probability setting value is being changed based on the reception of the command (step X30) during which the probability setting is being changed, and receives the command (step X37) during which the probability setting is being confirmed. Based on this, a notification is given to the effect that the probability setting value is being confirmed. The effect control device 300 may notify the setting history of the probability set value during the execution of these notifications.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 68A, the setting history calendar created based on the information (date and probability set value) stored in the setting history area of FeRAM 323 is displayed on the display device 41. May be. As a result, the clerk of the amusement store can change or confirm the probability set value while referring to the past probability set value.
In the example shown in FIG. 68 (a), the area corresponding to the current date (20XX year △ month 31) is surrounded by a thick frame.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 68 (a), since the setting history calendar displayed when the power is turned on for the first time on that day is shown, the probability is set in the area corresponding to the current day (20XX year △ month 31). The value is not displayed. That is, if the probability setting value is changed or confirmed when the power is turned on for the first time on that day, the probability setting information command for the first time on that day is sent after the change or confirmation is completed, so that the change or confirmation is being executed. Does not store the probability setting value corresponding to the current day in the setting history area of FeRAM323. Therefore, the probability setting value corresponding to the current day cannot be displayed in the setting history calendar displayed when the power is turned on for the first time on that day.

FIG. 68B shows an example of setting the gaming machine by the operation of the clerk of the gaming store. For example, when the effect button 25 is pressed twice while waiting for customers and the front frame 12 is open, the hall setting mode is set, and the hall setting screen as shown in FIG. 68B is displayed on the display device 41. Will be done.
In the example shown in FIG. 68 (b), as items that can be set on the hall setting screen, "volume setting" that sets the upper limit of the range in which the volume can be changed in the player setting mode, and decoration in the player setting mode. Set the upper limit of the range that allows the brightness of the LED used to be changed "
The item of "upper limit of player adjustment" for setting whether to enable or disable the upper limit set in "LED brightness setting", "volume setting", and "LED brightness setting" is displayed. In addition, the display device 4
"LCD brightness setting" to set the brightness of 1, "power saving setting" to set the presence or absence of power saving mode,
Setting the logo display color The "Logo color setting" item is displayed. Further, the items of "setting history recording" for setting whether or not the setting history of the probability setting value is stored and "setting suggestion effect" for setting whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed and the contents are displayed. And, in these items, the current setting is displayed identifiable. In addition, an item for exiting the hall setting mode and an item for "factory default setting" for returning to the factory default setting are also displayed.

Although not shown in FIG. 68B, a description of the operation on the hall setting screen may be displayed on the hall setting screen. On the hall setting screen, for example, an item can be selected (moved by the cursor) by touching either the top or bottom of the touch panel 29 on the upper surface of the effect button 25, and the touch panel 29 can be touched to the left or right. By doing so, you can change the current settings.

The currently selected item is indicated by the cursor highlighted so as to surround the item, and in the example shown in FIG. 68 (b), the cursor is located at the item of "setting suggestion effect". In the "setting suggestion effect" item, "OFF" is a setting that does not perform setting suggestion effect, and "ON (day of the week)" is a setting suggestion according to the probability setting value set on the same day as the current day of the week. It is a setting to perform an effect, and "ON (one week)" is a setting to perform a setting suggestion effect according to a probability setting value set in the latest one week including the current day, and is an example shown in FIG. 68 (b). Then "ON
(One week) ”is selected. That is, on the hall setting screen, it is possible to select whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect and the content (type) of the setting suggestion effect to be executed.
Further, in the item of "setting history recording", "OFF" is a setting that does not store the setting history of the probability setting value, and "ON" is a setting that stores the setting history of the probability setting value.
In the example shown in b), "ON" is selected. That is, on the hall setting screen, it is possible to select whether or not to store the setting history of the probability setting value.

The effect control device 300 displays the hall setting screen on the display device 41 to accept the setting of the gaming machine by the operation of the clerk of the game store, or displays the player setting screen on the display device 41 to play the game by the operation of the player. Hall / player setting mode processing (step C10) is performed as a process for accepting machine settings. In the hall / player setting mode processing, for example, when the current setting of "setting suggestion effect" is changed on the hall setting screen, the changed setting (execution of the setting suggestion effect) in the area for setting suggestion effect of FeRAM323. Presence / absence and contents) are overwritten.
Also, for example, when the current setting of "setting history recording" is changed on the hall setting screen, F
The changed setting (presence / absence of setting history recording) is overwritten in the area for setting suggestion effect of eRAM323. Further, for example, when it is selected to return to the factory default setting in the "factory default setting" on the hall setting screen, the information stored in the setting history area of FeRAM323 (
Date and probability setting value) are all cleared.

When the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting information command, FeRA
Presence / absence of setting history recording stored in the setting suggestion effect area of M323 (ON / OFF)
If "Yes (ON)" is stored, the area for the setting history of FeRAM323 and the area for the probability setting value of FeRAM323 (for the probability setting value in the RWM of the game control device 100). The current probability setting value is stored in the area corresponding to the area). On the other hand, "None (OFF)
) ”Is stored, the current probability setting value is stored only in the area for the probability setting value of FeRAM323.

In the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 displays the color of the logo displayed on the display device 41 at the end of the ending effect executed during the first special game state (special game state based on the jackpot) as the setting suggestion effect. , An effect of displaying in a setting suggestion color (for example, silver) different from the normal color (color that can be set on the hall setting screen) is executed.
In addition, as the setting suggestion effect, "day of the week setting suggestion effect" executed when there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than the predetermined value among the probability setting values set on the predetermined day of the week (the same day as the current day of the week), The "period setting suggestion effect" executed when there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than the predetermined value among the probability setting values set in the predetermined period (the latest week including the current day) and the current probability setting value are It is possible to execute the "same-day setting suggestion effect" that is executed when the value is equal to or more than a predetermined value.

In this embodiment, the predetermined day of the week is the same day of the week as the current day of the week. That is, the "day of the week setting suggestion effect" is an effect to be executed when there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined value among the probability setting values set on the same day as the current day of the week. It may be a day different from the day of the week. In addition, it may be possible to select which day of the week to use on the hall setting screen or the like.
Further, in the present embodiment, the predetermined period is the latest one week including the current date. That is, "
"Period setting suggestion effect" is an effect to be executed when there is a probability setting value equal to or more than a predetermined value among the probability setting values set in the last week including the current date, but the current date is used for the specified period. It is not limited to the latest week including, for example, the latest week not including the current date, the latest month including (or not including) the current date, or including the current date. It may be the last three days (or not included). Further, the length of the period and whether or not to include the current date may be selected on the hall setting screen or the like.

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 69 shows the ending effect setting process (step C411) in the above-mentioned jackpot command process (FIG. 67). In this ending effect setting process, first, the ending effect is set based on the information of the big hit type and the information of the small hit type that triggered the occurrence of the special gaming state this time (step C451). It is determined whether the set ending effect is the ending effect for executing the logo display effect (step C452).
). Here, the logo display effect is an effect executed at the end of the ending effect, and is an effect of displaying the logo on the display device 41 in the color set in the "logo color setting" of the hall setting screen.

If the set ending effect is not the ending effect for executing the logo display effect (step C452; N), the ending effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the set ending effect is an ending effect for executing the logo display effect (step C452;
Y) performs the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C453).
Then, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is not determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C454; N), the ending effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C454; Y), the setting suggestion effect is set instead of the logo display effect (step C455), and the ending effect setting process is terminated.

By performing the process of step C455, the setting suggestion effect of displaying the logo in the setting suggestion color is executed instead of the logo display effect of displaying the logo in the color set in the "logo color setting" of the hall setting screen. Will be done. The color for suggesting the setting is not limited to the color that cannot be set on the hall setting screen. For example, the color that can be set on the hall setting screen is the current display color of the logo (the "logo" on the hall setting screen). It may be a color other than the color set in "Color setting".
Further, the setting suggestion effect may be different from the logo display effect. That is, the setting suggestion effect is the display color, size, display position, and movement of the logo, and the display color, size, display position, and movement of images other than the logo (for example, character image and character image) displayed in the logo display effect. , Any one or more of the background color and the like in the logo display effect may be different from the logo display effect.

[Setting suggestion effect judgment processing]
FIG. 70 shows the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C453) in the above-mentioned ending effect setting process (FIG. 69). In this setting suggestion effect determination process, first, it is determined whether the number of balls acquired (total number of payouts based on winning in the winning area) from the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on to the present is a specified number (for example, 5000) or more. Determination (step C461). Winning opening switch /
In the state monitoring process (step X109), the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 receives a winning detection command corresponding to the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening 3
The winning detection command corresponding to the starting port 1 switch 36a of 6 and the winning detection command corresponding to the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37, and the large winning opening switches 38a and 39a of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The corresponding winning detection commands are transmitted, and the effect control device 300 can calculate the number of balls to be won based on these commands.

If the number of balls acquired from the time when the power is turned on is not more than the specified number (step C461; N), the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated. As a result, when the number of balls acquired from the time when the power is turned on is less than the specified number, the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect can be suppressed.
On the other hand, when the number of balls acquired from the time when the power is turned on is equal to or more than the specified number (step C461; Y).
Determines whether the current base value is equal to or higher than the specified value (step C462). In the performance display editing process (step X52), commands related to the base value and the accessory ratio displayed on the performance display device 153 are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device In 300, the current base value can be grasped based on this command. Here, the base value is paid out based on the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the winning in the winning area. It is a value calculated from a number. In addition, the bonus ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the prize opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present, during the big hit state (that is, fanfare and ending). It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening (excluding the inside) (so-called continuous character ratio).

If the current base value is not equal to or greater than the specified value (step C462; N), the setting suggestion determination process ends. As a result, when the current base value is less than the specified value, the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect can be suppressed. Further, in the setting suggestion effect of the present embodiment, there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined value in the past or present probability setting value, that is, the past or present jackpot probability value (probability value) is relatively high. When the current base value is high (when the current base value is equal to or higher than the specified value)
By executing the setting suggestion effect only in, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect can be enhanced. Further, before the determination of whether the current base value is equal to or higher than the specified value (step C462), it is determined whether the number of balls acquired from the time when the power is turned on is equal to or higher than the specified number (step C461). It is possible to decide whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the base value.

It should be noted that the larger the specified number of balls to be acquired, the more accurate the base value can be obtained. However, if the specified number of balls to be acquired is too large, the number of balls to be acquired becomes more than the specified number (that is,). It takes time (until the setting suggestion effect becomes feasible). Therefore, in consideration of these balances, the specified number of balls to be won is set.
Further, the specified value of the base value is, for example, the lower limit value of the normal range in the design of the base value.
Since the normal range in the design of the base value differs depending on the current probability set value, that is, the current jackpot probability value (probability value), in step C462, the current base value corresponds to the current probability set value. Determine if it is greater than or equal to the lower limit of the range. Further, in step C462,
It is determined whether or not the current base value is within the normal range corresponding to the current probability setting value, the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated when it is not within the normal range, and step C is when it is within the normal range.
It is also possible to configure it to proceed to 463. Further, in step C462, the current accessory ratio may be determined instead of the current base value.

On the other hand, when the current base value is equal to or higher than the specified value (step C462; Y), FeRA
ON / OFF of execution of setting suggestion effect stored in the area for setting suggestion effect of M323 (
It is determined whether (presence / absence) is OFF (step C463), and if it is OFF (step C).
463; Y) ends the setting suggestion effect determination process. As a result, when OFF is selected in the item of "setting suggestion effect" on the hall setting screen, the setting suggestion effect is not executed.
Further, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is ON (step C463; N), FeRAM
It is determined whether ON / OFF (presence / absence) of the setting history recording stored in the setting suggestion effect area of 323 is OFF (step C464), and when it is OFF (step C464;
Y), that is, when the setting history of the probability setting value is not stored, the probability setting value (that is, the current probability setting value) stored in the area for the probability setting value of FeRAM323 is a predetermined threshold value (for example, setting). 4) It is determined whether it is the above (step C468). Then, when the current probability setting value is not equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value (step C468; N), the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated. Further, when the current probability setting value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (step C468).
Y) determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect (step C469), and ends the setting suggestion effect determination process.

On the other hand, when the setting history recording is ON (step C464; N), FeRAM323
It is determined whether or not the content of the setting suggestion effect stored in the setting suggestion effect area of is "day of the week" (step C465). Then, when it is not a "day of the week" (step C465; N), that is, when it is "one week", each probability setting set in the latest one week including the current date from the setting history (area for the setting history of FeRAM323) is set. Values are extracted, and it is determined whether or not there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (for example, setting 4) among these probability setting values (step C466).
.. Then, when there is no probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value in the probability setting values for the last week (step C466; N), the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated. Further, when there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value in the probability setting values for the last week (step C466; Y), the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (step C469), and the setting suggestion effect determination process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, in the case of "day of the week" (step C465; Y), the setting history (FeRAM323)
Each probability setting value (including the probability setting value corresponding to the current day) set on the same day of the week as the current day of the week is extracted from the setting history area), and a predetermined threshold value (including the probability setting value corresponding to the current day) is extracted. For example, it is determined whether or not there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than the setting 4) (step C467). Then, when there is no probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value in the probability setting values of the same day of the week as the current day of the week (step C467).
; N) ends the setting suggestion effect determination process. Further, when the probability setting value of the same day as the current day of the week contains a probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (step C467; Y), it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (step C469), and the setting suggestion is performed. The effect determination process ends.

In the setting suggestion effect determination process, the determination of whether the number of balls acquired from the time when the power is turned on is equal to or greater than the specified number (step C461) and the determination of whether the current base value is equal to or greater than the specified value (step C462). At least one may be omitted.
Further, the process of step C462 may be performed after the process of steps C466 to C468. That is, in the setting suggestion effect determination process, when there is no probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value in the probability setting values of the latest week including the current day (step C466; N), the probability setting of the same day of the week as the current day of the week is set. When there is no probability setting value above a predetermined threshold value in the value (step C467)
N), or when the current probability set value is not greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold (step C468;
In N), it may be determined whether or not the current base value is equal to or greater than the specified value (step C462), and if the current base value is equal to or greater than the specified value, it may be decided to execute the setting suggestion effect. In this case, the specified value of the base value is actually set by, for example, the lower limit value of the normal range in the design of the base value when the probability setting value is a predetermined threshold value (for example, setting 4). Suggested setting when there is no probability setting value above a predetermined threshold value in the past or present probability setting value, but the actual probability setting value is above a predetermined threshold value (that is, when the ball ejection situation is favorable). Since the effect is executed, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect without lowering the reliability of the setting suggestion effect. Further, in this case, before the determination of whether the current base value is equal to or more than the specified value (step C462), it is determined whether the number of balls acquired from the time when the power is turned on is equal to or more than the specified number (step C461). Is preferable.

Further, the setting suggestion effect is the display of the display device 41, the LE of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46.
Any effect may be used as long as it is an effect that suggests past or present probability setting values by the light emission of D, the operation of the board effect device 44, the output of sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like.
Further, the setting suggestion effect is not limited to the one executed in place of the logo display effect executed at the end of the ending effect. That is, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in place of any of the effects executed by the gaming machine 10. For example, when the setting suggestion effect is to be executed in place of any of the effects executed during the fanfare effect, the setting suggestion effect determination process (FIG. 70) is performed in the fanfare effect setting process (step C402). Will be. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is to be executed in place of any of the effects executed as the effect (look-ahead effect) related to the unexecuted special figure variation display game, the look-ahead symbol command process (step C244). Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect determination process (FIG. 70) is performed in the look-ahead variable command process (step C246). Further, when the setting suggestion effect is to be executed in place of any of the effects executed as the effect related to the special figure variation display game being executed, the variable effect setting process (step C365) of the variable system command process is performed. The setting suggestion effect determination process (FIG. 70) is performed in.
Specifically, the setting suggestion effect may be executed, for example, in place of the advance notice effect regarding the special figure variation display game being executed. In that case, the effect control device 300 may be executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 71. Executes the variable effect setting process.

[Variable effect setting process]
FIG. 71 shows the variation effect setting process (step C365) in the above-mentioned variable command process.
) Is shown. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is reachless variation (step C381). When the variation pattern type is non-reach variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, and effect mode is set (step C382). Since it is a variation without reach, the symbol type is always a missed symbol, and it is not necessary to refer to the symbol type in particular here. The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and is naturally different depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a chance mode, a small hit RUSH, and the like. Further, each mode is provided with a plurality of modes in which the distribution rate of the advance notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41 are different.

Next, with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the reserved number of MODE and special figure type is acquired (step C383).
.. As a result, in the case of non-reach variation, it is possible to change the lottery content of the advance notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each advance notice effect mode) that appears during each change according to the number of reservations. After that, the notice lottery that appears during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice distribution group table (step C386).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (step C381; N), the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special symbol type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half is changing using the first half notice distribution group table. The notice lottery that appears in is performed (step C386).

Next, a lottery will be drawn for the advance notice of changes in the second half. The latter half of the special figure variation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a variation display in a special result mode (combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of multiple columns of the special figure is a big hit). Is stopped and variable display is performed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the latter half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C387). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half notice distribution group table. Then, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and the second half is changing (during reach) using the second half notice distribution group table. Lottery for notice of appearance is performed (step C389)
..

After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390).
The content of the production corresponding to the notice lottery result is determined (step C391). As a result, the production and notice of the variable time of the decorative special figure variation display game and the main reach contents will be determined. Further, the stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol is performed with reference to the determined variation pattern (reach effect, etc.), notice content, and game state of the determined special figure variation display game (step C392).
).
Next, the display setting of the variable effect is set (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is set (step C393).
Step C394). By these processes, it becomes possible to execute the effect and the advance notice in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above.

After that, it is determined whether there is a changeable notice effect in the setting suggestion effect in the notice effect for which the display setting is made in step C394 (step C399a), and there is no changeable notice effect in the setting suggestion effect (step C399a). C399a; N) proceeds to step C395. Further, when the setting suggestion effect has a changeable notice effect (step C399a; Y), the setting suggestion effect determination process is performed (step C399b). As a result, for example, the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 70 is performed.
Then, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is not determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C399c; N), the process proceeds to step C395. Further, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined by the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C399c; Y), the setting suggestion effect is displayed and set instead of the notice effect that can be changed to the setting suggestion effect (step C399d), and the step. C39
Move to 5.

For example, when the notice effect that can be changed to the setting suggestion effect is an effect of displaying the main character during reach, and the setting suggestion effect is an effect of displaying the character for setting suggestion during reach, the notice effect is displayed. By displaying and setting the setting suggestion effect instead of, the character for setting suggestion appears in the reach instead of the main character. This makes it possible to indicate to the player that the setting suggestion effect has been executed, that is, that the past or present jackpot probability value (probability value) is relatively high.

Next, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, a setting is made to reduce the decorative special figure start memory display in response to the decrease in the start memory corresponding to the start of the special figure variation display game.
Then, a sound number, which is a BGM number, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C396), and the decoration special figure variation (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is performed. Set the display (step C397). Further, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol that displays the decorative special symbol variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (step C398). , Ends the variable effect setting process.

Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (effect button 25 or touch panel 29). Specifically, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means during the logo display effect executed at the end of the ending effect, in which case the effect control device 300 may perform the effect control device 300. Instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 69, for example, the ending effect setting process as shown in FIG. 72 (a) is executed.

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 72 (a) shows the ending effect setting process in the above-mentioned jackpot command process (
A modification of step C411) is shown. In this ending effect setting process, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C454; Y), the change reservation from the logo display effect to the setting suggestion effect, that is, the operation means during the logo display effect. When there is a predetermined operation for, the reservation for ending the logo display effect being executed and starting the setting suggestion effect is set (step C456).
By setting the change reservation in this way, when a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means during the execution of the logo display effect, the setting suggestion effect is executed instead of the logo display effect, for example, the logo display color. However, the color set in "Logo color setting" on the hall setting screen will change to the color for suggesting the setting. This makes it possible to indicate to the player that the setting suggestion effect has been executed, that is, that the past or present jackpot probability value (probability value) is relatively high.

Further, the setting suggestion effect is not limited to the effect executed in place of the effect scheduled to be executed, and may be, for example, an effect executed in addition to the effect scheduled to be executed. Specifically, the setting suggestion effect may be an effect additionally executed during the ending effect, in which case the effect control device 300 replaces the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 69, for example. The ending effect setting process as shown in FIG. 72 (b) is executed.

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 72 (b) shows the ending effect setting process in the above-mentioned jackpot command process (
A modification of step C411) is shown. In this ending effect setting process, first, the ending effect is set based on the hit type information and the like (step C451), and the setting suggestion effect lottery for deciding whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is performed (step C457a). If the setting suggestion effect lottery is not won (step C457b; N), the ending effect setting process is terminated, and if the setting suggestion effect lottery is won (step C457b; Y), the setting suggestion effect determination process is performed. (Step C453).

When the setting suggestion effect determination process does not determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect (step C454; N), the ending effect setting process is terminated and the setting suggestion effect determination process determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect. (Step C454; Y) sets the setting suggestion effect (step C457c), and ends the ending effect setting process. For example, the setting suggestion effect
Among the LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the LE that decorates the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37.
In the case of the effect of blinking D, the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is performed at a predetermined timing during the ending effect by setting the setting suggestion effect (step C457c).
The LED that decorates the will blink. This makes it possible to indicate to the player that the setting suggestion effect has been executed, that is, that the past or present jackpot probability value (probability value) is relatively high.
Here, in the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 72 (b), steps C457a to
The processing of C457b may be omitted.
Further, in the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 72 (b), instead of the process of setting the setting suggestion effect (step C457c), the process of setting the execution reservation of the setting suggestion effect, that is, the predetermined operation unit during the ending effect. When there is an operation, a process of setting a reservation for starting the setting suggestion effect may be performed.

Further, the type (content) of the setting suggestion effect that can be executed in the gaming machine 10 may be one type or a plurality of types.
When there are multiple types of setting suggestion effects, the hall setting screen (the screen displayed on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode) is configured to shift to the designation screen for specifying the types of setting suggestion effects. It is also possible to do. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 73A, in a state where the cursor is located in the item of "setting suggestion effect" and "ON" is selected in the item, for example. Touch panel 29 on the top of the effect button 25
When the operation of touching the central part of is performed, the specification screen for specifying the type of setting suggestion effect is displayed. It should be noted that the player setting screen (the screen displayed on the display device 41 in the player setting mode) may be configured to shift to the designation screen for designating the type of setting suggestion effect.

On this designation screen, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the currently selected type is indicated by the cursor highlighted so as to surround the type of the setting suggestion effect, and FIG. 73 (b). In the example shown in, the cursor is located at "Suggestion of day of the week setting".
Here, among the types of setting suggestion effects exemplified in FIG. 73 (b), the "monthly average suggestion" is, for example, the latest one month including the current date from the setting history (area for the setting history of FeRAM323) (
Alternatively, it may be the latest one month not including the current date), each probability setting value is extracted, the average value of these probability setting values is calculated, and the execution is performed in a mode corresponding to the average value. It is a production. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the tendency of the usual probability setting value in the gaming machine 10.
Alternatively, in the "monthly average suggestion", the average value of the probability set values of the latest one month including the current date (or the latest one month not including the current date) was equal to or higher than the predetermined value. It may be an effect to be executed in some cases. This makes it possible to suggest that the probability setting value is usually relatively high in the gaming machine 10.

Further, among the types of setting suggestion effects exemplified in FIG. 73 (b), the "weekly average suggestion" is, for example, the latest one week (or the current date) including the current date from the setting history (area for the setting history of FeRAM323). It is an effect that is executed in a mode corresponding to the average value by extracting each probability setting value set in (may be the latest week that does not include) and calculating the average value of these probability setting values. .. This makes it possible to suggest the tendency of the probability setting value of this week in the gaming machine 10.
Alternatively, the "weekly average suggestion" is the average value of the probability setting values of the latest week including the current date (or the latest week not including the current date), that is, the average value of the probability setting values of this week. May be an effect performed when is higher than the average value of the probability setting values of last week. From this, it can be suggested that the probability setting value of this week is higher than that of last week in the gaming machine 10.

Further, among the types of setting suggestion effects exemplified in FIG. 73 (b), the "one week high setting suggestion" is, for example, the latest one week including the current date from the setting history (area for the setting history of FeRAM323).
Alternatively, it may be the latest week that does not include the current date), and each probability setting value is extracted, and it is executed when there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value among these probability setting values. It is a production. That is, it is the same as the above-mentioned "period setting suggestion effect". From this, it can be suggested that a relatively high probability setting value is set in any of this week in the gaming machine 10.

Further, among the types of setting suggestion effects exemplified in FIG. 73 (b), the "day of the week average suggestion" is, for example, a predetermined day of the week (for example, the same day of the week as the current day of the week) from the setting history (area for the setting history of FeRAM323). It is an effect performed by extracting each probability setting value set in the above, calculating the average value of these probability setting values, and executing the mode according to the average value. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the tendency of the probability setting value of the predetermined day of the week in the gaming machine 10.
Alternatively, the "day of the week average suggestion" may be an effect executed when the average value of the probability set values of a predetermined day of the week is equal to or more than a predetermined value. This makes it possible to suggest that the probability setting value for a predetermined day of the week is relatively high in the gaming machine 10.

Further, among the types of setting suggestion effects exemplified in FIG. 73 (b), the “day height setting suggestion” is, for example, each probability setting value set on a predetermined day from the setting history (area for the setting history of FeRAM323). Is extracted, and it is an effect executed when there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value among these probability setting values. That is, it is the same as the above-mentioned "day of the week setting suggestion effect". This makes it possible to suggest that the gaming machine 10 tends to set a relatively high probability setting value on a predetermined day of the week.

Further, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. 73 (b), the "daily average suggestion with 3" is
For example, 3 days (3 days, 13) from the setting history (area for setting history of FeRAM323)
It is an effect performed by extracting each probability setting value set on the day and the 23rd, calculating the average value of these probability setting values, and executing the mode according to the average value. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the tendency of the probability setting value of the 3rd day in the gaming machine 10.
Further, among the types of setting suggestion effects exemplified in FIG. 73 (b), the "three-attached Hidaka setting suggestion" is, for example, a three-attached day (3 days, from the setting history (area for the setting history of FeRAM323)). 1
It is an effect executed when each probability setting value set on the 3rd and 23rd) is extracted and there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value among these probability setting values. This makes it possible to suggest that the gaming machine 10 tends to set a relatively high probability setting value on the day when the number 3 is attached.
It is also possible to suggest the average or high setting of the day with a number other than 3, for example, the average or high setting of the day with the same number as the number attached to the current day may be suggested. It is also possible to select which number will be attached on the hall setting screen or the like.

Further, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. 73 (b), for "deferred suggestion", for example, the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value are extracted from the setting history (area for the setting history of FeRAM323). However, it is an effect that is executed when these are the same. This makes it possible to suggest that the current probability set value and the previous day's probability set value are the same in the gaming machine 10.
Further, among the types of setting suggestion effects exemplified in FIG. 73 (b), for "change suggestion", for example, the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value are extracted from the setting history (area for the setting history of FeRAM323). However, it is an effect that is executed when these are different. As a result, the gaming machine 10
Then, it can be suggested that the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value are different.

Further, among the types of setting suggestion effects exemplified in FIG. 73 (b), the "significant change suggestion" is, for example, the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value from the setting history (area for the setting history of FeRAM323). It is an effect that is extracted and executed when these differences are two or more stages. This makes it possible to suggest that the current probability set value and the previous day's probability set value are significantly different in the gaming machine 10. Further, by selecting "significant change suggestion" as the type of setting suggestion effect, for example, when it is rich that the probability setting value of the previous day in the gaming machine 10 is setting 2, the player can select the setting suggestion effect. With the appearance of the setting suggestion effect, it can be determined that the current probability setting value is set to 4 or more.

When the designated screen shown in FIG. 73B can be displayed, for example, the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 74 is executed instead of the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 70. In this setting suggestion effect determination process, first, a random number lottery for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is performed (step C470). Then, when the random number lottery is not won (step C471; N).
) Ends the setting suggestion effect determination process and wins the random number lottery (step C471; Y).
) Moves to the process of step C463.
Then, O of the setting history recording stored in the area for setting suggestion effect of FeRAM323.
When N / OFF (presence / absence) is OFF (step C464; Y), that is, when the setting history of the probability setting value is not stored, the probability setting value stored in the area for the probability setting value of FeRAM323 (step C464; Y). That is, if the current probability setting value) is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (for example, setting 4), the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (step C474), and the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated. That is, in this case, if the current probability setting value is not equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value, the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated without deciding the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

On the other hand, when the setting history recording is ON (step C464; N), FeRAM323
The contents of the setting suggestion effect stored in the area for the setting suggestion effect of are "Monthly average suggestion" and "
It is determined whether it is one of "weekly average", "day of the week average suggestion", and "daily average suggestion with 3" (step C472). Then, in the case of any one of "monthly average suggestion", "weekly average", "day of the week average suggestion" and "daily average suggestion with 3" (step C472; Y),
The target probability setting value is extracted from the setting history (area for setting history of FeRAM323), and if the average value of these values is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (for example, setting 4), the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (for example, setting 4).
Step C473), the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated. That is, in this case, if the average value of the target probability setting values is not equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value, the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated without deciding the execution of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, the target probability setting value is set in the latest one month including the current date (or the latest one month not including the current date) in the case of "monthly average suggestion". Each probability setting value, and in the case of "weekly average suggestion", it is each probability setting value set in the latest week including the current date (or the latest week not including the current date). , In the case of "day of the week average suggestion", it is each probability setting value set on a predetermined day of the week (for example, the same day as the current day of the week), and in the case of "day of the week average suggestion of 3", the day with 3 (for example, the day with 3). 3
It is each probability setting value set on the day, the 13th, and the 23rd).

In addition, when it is neither "monthly average suggestion", "weekly average suggestion", "day of the week average suggestion", or "daily average suggestion with 3" (step C472; N), it is for setting suggestion effect of FeRAM323. It is determined whether the content of the setting suggestion effect stored in the area of is one of "one week high setting suggestion", "day of the week high setting suggestion", and "3 day high setting suggestion" (step C).
475). Then, in the case of any one of "one week high setting suggestion", "day of the week high setting suggestion" and "3 day high setting suggestion" (step C475; Y), the setting history (FeRAM323).
The target probability setting value is extracted from the setting history area), and if there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (for example, setting 4), the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (step C476).
, Ends the setting suggestion effect determination process. That is, in this case, if there is no probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value among the target probability setting values, the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated without deciding the execution of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, the target probability setting value is each probability set in the latest week including the current date (or the latest week not including the current date) in the case of "suggestion of high setting for one week". It is a set value, and in the case of "suggestion of day height setting", it is each probability setting value set on a predetermined day of the week (for example, the same day as the current day of the week), and in the case of "suggestion of setting day height with 3". It is each probability setting value set on the day of the week (3rd, 13th, 23rd).

Further, when it is neither "1 week high setting suggestion", "day of the week high setting suggestion", or "3 day height setting suggestion" (step C475; N), it is stored in the setting suggestion effect area of FeRAM323. It is determined whether or not the content of the setting suggestion effect is "deferred suggestion" (step C477). Then, in the case of "deferred suggestion" (step C477; Y), the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value are extracted from the setting history (area for the setting history of FeRAM323), and if they are the same. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect (step C478),
The setting suggestion effect judgment process is terminated. That is, in this case, if the current probability setting value and the probability setting value of the previous day are not the same, the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated without deciding the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

Further, when it is not "deferred suggestion" (step C477; N), it is determined whether the content of the setting suggestion effect stored in the area for setting suggestion effect of FeRAM323 is "change suggestion" (step C479). Then, in the case of "change suggestion" (step C479; Y).
) Extracts the current probability setting value and the probability setting value of the previous day from the setting history (area for the setting history of FeRAM323), and if they are not the same, determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect (step C480). The setting suggestion effect judgment process is terminated. That is, in this case, if the current probability setting value and the probability setting value of the previous day are the same, the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated without deciding the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

Further, when it is not a "change suggestion" (step C479; N), that is, FeRAM323
If the content of the setting suggestion effect stored in the setting suggestion effect area of is "significant change suggestion", the current probability setting value and the probability setting of the previous day are set from the setting history (the area for the setting history of FeRAM323). The values are extracted, and if the difference between them is two or more stages, the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (step C481), and the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated. That is, in this case, if the difference between the current probability setting value and the probability setting value on the previous day is not two or more stages, the setting suggestion effect determination process is terminated without deciding the execution of the setting suggestion effect.
It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect determination process in the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 72 (b) (
When the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 74 is performed as step C453), the processes of steps C457a to C457b are omitted.

Further, the setting suggestion effect may be an effect of displaying the setting history calendar at a predetermined timing. This makes it possible to perform "day of the week high setting suggestion", "one week high setting suggestion", "3 day high setting suggestion", "deferred suggestion", "change suggestion", and "significant change suggestion" at once. Will be.
When the setting suggestion effect is an effect of displaying the setting history calendar, it is preferable that the setting history calendar to be displayed vaguely suggests the probability setting value, for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (a). In the example shown in FIG. 75 (a), for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the day when any of settings 1 to 3 is set is painted in blue, and any of settings 4 to 6 is set. The sun is painted red, and one of them has been changed to purple.
Further, instead of displaying (or in addition to) the setting history calendar as shown in FIG. 75 (a) as a setting suggestion effect, the setting history calendar as shown in FIG. 75 (a) is displayed, for example, waiting for customers. It may be displayed when the player performs a predetermined operation during a predetermined period such as medium.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) becomes a special result. A setting means (game control device 100) for setting a probability setting value of one of a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability value used for the lottery is assigned, and a storage for storing the probability setting value set by the setting means as a setting history. Means (effect control device 300 (FeRAM323)) and predetermined parameters (for example, day, week, only on the day, one month, three days, the day and the day before) among the probability setting values stored as the setting history. ), Based on the probability set value, is configured to include an execution means (effect control device 300) for executing a suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect) regarding the probability set value.
With this configuration, not only the suggestion effect based on the current probability setting value but also the suggestion effect based on the past probability setting value can be executed. Therefore, the probability setting value can be changed by executing the suggestion effect. It is possible to effectively appeal to the player regarding the probability setting value, such as the fact that it is a model and that the probability setting value is changed from usual.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is of a person in charge class who can hold a setting key and perform a setting change operation among hall staff (for example, among the clerk of a game store, whether or not to store the setting history. A first selection means (touch panel 29) for the clerk to select, a second selection means (touch panel 29) for the hall staff to select whether or not the suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect) can be executed. (See FIG. 68 (b)).
By configuring in this way, it is optional whether or not to execute the suggestion effect, and whether the suggestion effect to be executed is an effect that suggests only the current probability setting value or an effect that also suggests the past probability setting value. Since it can be selected with, it is possible to give freedom to the operation of the hall.
The first selection means and the second selection means may be different operation means from each other.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution means (effect control device 300) has a predetermined threshold value (for example, one week, a day of the week, and a day with 3) in a probability set value corresponding to a predetermined parameter (for example, one week, a day of the week, and a day with 3). For example, it is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect) depending on whether or not there is a probability setting value of setting 4) or higher (see FIGS. 70 and 73 (b)).
With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value in the past or present probability setting values by executing the suggestion effect.

In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed only when there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value in the past or present probability setting values, but the present invention is not limited to this. for example,
If there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value in the past or current probability setting value, the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, and the probability setting value equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value in the past or present probability setting value. If there is no probability setting value of, the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode different from the first effect mode may be executed.
That is, instead of the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 70, the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 76 may be executed.

In the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 76, when there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value in the probability setting values of the latest week including the current day (step C466; Y), the day of the week is the same as the current day of the week. When there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value in the probability setting value (step C467; Y)
Alternatively, when the current probability setting value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (step C468; Y), it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode (step C469a).
On the other hand, when there is no probability setting value equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value in the probability setting value of the latest week including the current day (step C466; N), the predetermined threshold value is included in the probability setting value of the same day of the week as the current day of the week. When there is no above probability setting value (step C467; N), or when the current probability setting value is not equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (step C468; N), it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode. (Step C469b).

Then, for example, when the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 76 is performed as the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C453) in the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 69.
When the process of determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode (step C469a) is performed, in step C455, the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is set instead of the logo display effect.
Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect determination process in the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 69 (
When the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 76 is performed as step C453) and the process for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode (step C469b) is performed, in step C455, Instead of the logo display effect, the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode is set.

The same applies to the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 74.
That is, in step C473, when the average value of the target probability set values is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode, and the average value of the target probability set values is a predetermined threshold value. If the above is not the case, it may be decided to execute the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode.
Further, in step C474, when the current probability set value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value, the execution of the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is determined, and when the current probability set value is not equal to or more than the predetermined threshold value, the first effect is determined. 2 Setting of effect mode The execution of the suggestion effect may be decided.
Further, in step C476, when there is a probability setting value equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value in the target probability setting value, it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode, and the target probability setting value is predetermined. If there is no probability setting value equal to or greater than the threshold value of, the execution of the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode may be decided.
Further, in step C478, when the current probability setting value and the probability setting value of the previous day are the same, it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode, and the current probability setting value and the probability setting value of the previous day are set. If they are not the same, it may be decided to execute the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode.
Further, in step C480, if the current probability setting value and the probability setting value of the previous day are not the same, it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode, and the current probability setting value and the probability setting value of the previous day are the same. If this is the case, it may be decided to execute the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode.
Further, in step C481, when the difference between the current probability set value and the probability set value of the previous day is two or more stages, it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode, and the current probability set value and the previous day are determined. When the difference between the probability setting values is not two or more stages, it may be decided to execute the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution means (effect control device) is a suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect) according to any one of the average value, the change frequency, and the change amount of the probability set values corresponding to the predetermined parameters. ) Can be configured to be feasible (see FIG. 73 (b)). FIG. 73
In the example shown in (b), the suggestion effect according to the average value of the probability set values is "monthly average suggestion".
"Weekly average suggestion", "day of the week average suggestion", "3 day average suggestion", and the suggestion effects according to the change frequency of the probability setting value are "deferred suggestion", "change suggestion", and probability setting. The suggestion effect according to the amount of change in the value is "significant change suggestion".
With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the tendency of the probability set value in the gaming machine 10 by executing the suggestion effect.

<Hall setting, player setting>
The effect control device 300 can set a changeable range determined by the game store (hall) for the brightness, volume, and the like of the LED and the liquid crystal display that can be changed by the player by the hall setting mode process (step C10). Further, the effect control device 300 is L based on the operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 by the player by the player setting mode process (step C11).
It is possible to change the brightness, volume, etc. of the ED and liquid crystal display.

FIG. 77A shows an example of setting the gaming machine by the operation of the clerk of the gaming store. For example, when the effect button 25 is pressed twice while waiting for customers and the front frame 12 is open, the hall setting mode is set, and the hall setting screen as shown in FIG. 77A is displayed on the display device 41. Will be done. The display contents of the screen are substantially the same as those in FIG. 68 (a), but FIG. 77 (a) displays a description of the operation on the hole setting screen. On the hall setting screen, you can select an item (move the cursor) by touching either the top or bottom of the touch panel 29 on the upper surface of the effect button 25, and by touching either the left or right side of the touch panel 29. , You can change the current settings.

The currently selected item is indicated by the cursor highlighted so as to surround the item, and in the example shown in FIG. 77 (a), the cursor is located in the "volume setting" item. By touching the left area of the touch panel 29 with the volume setting selected in this way, the value of the volume setting decreases, and by touching the right area of the touch panel 29, the value of the volume setting increases.
Further, by touching the lower area of the touch panel 29 with the volume setting selected in this way, the cursor moves downward and the LED brightness setting item is selected. By touching the left area of the touch panel 29 with the LED brightness setting item selected, the LED brightness setting value decreases.
By touching the right area of the touch panel 29, the value of the LED brightness setting increases. For other items, the values and settings can be changed by touching the left and right areas of the touch panel 29 with the cursor placed on the touch panel 29. The contents set in this way are stored in the area of each item of FeRAM323.

FIG. 77B shows an example of setting the gaming machine by the operation of the player. For example, when the effect button 25 is pressed during the customer waiting demonstration, the player setting mode is set, and the player setting screen as shown in FIG. 77B is displayed on the display device 41.

In the example shown in FIG. 77 (b), the items that can be set on the player setting screen are "volume setting" that allows the volume to be changed and "LED brightness" that allows the brightness of the LED used for decoration to be changed. The "Settings" item is displayed. In the "volume setting" and "LED brightness setting", the value can be changed within the range of the upper limit set in the hall setting mode. Although not shown in FIG. 77 (b), a description of the operation on the hall setting screen may be displayed on the hall setting screen. On the hall setting screen, you can select an item (move the cursor) by touching either the top or bottom of the touch panel 29 on the upper surface of the effect button 25, and the touch panel 29.
You can change the current setting by touching either the left or right side of.

The currently selected item is indicated by the cursor highlighted so as to surround the item, and in the example shown in FIG. 77 (b), the cursor is located in the "volume setting" item. By touching the left area of the touch panel 29 with the volume setting selected in this way, the value of the volume setting decreases, and by touching the right area of the touch panel 29, the value of the volume setting increases.
Further, by touching the lower area of the touch panel 29 with the volume setting selected in this way, the cursor moves downward and the LED brightness setting item is selected. By touching the left area of the touch panel 29 with the LED brightness setting item selected, the LED brightness setting value decreases.
By touching the right area of the touch panel 29, the value of the LED brightness setting increases. The contents set in this way are stored in the area of each item of FeRAM323.

[Hall setting mode processing]
FIG. 78 shows the hall setting mode process (step C10) in the above-mentioned main process. In this hall setting mode processing, first, it is determined whether or not the hall setting mode, which is a state in which information is set on the game store side, is in progress (step C501). When the hole setting mode is in progress, the hole setting mode flag is set, and it is possible to determine whether the hole setting mode is in effect depending on the presence or absence of this flag. If the hall setting mode is in progress (step C501; Y), the process proceeds to step C505.

When not in the hole setting mode (step C501; N), it is determined whether the start condition of the hole setting mode is satisfied (step C502). The start condition of the hall setting mode here is, for example, the effect button 2 in a state of waiting for customers and a state in which the front frame 12 is open.
5 is pressed twice. If the start condition of the hole setting mode is not satisfied (step C502; N), the hole setting mode process is terminated. When the start condition of the hole setting mode is satisfied (step C502; Y), the screen drawing start of the hole setting mode is set (step C503), and the flag in the hole setting mode is set (step C504).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an upward cursor operation as a process for selecting an item (step C505). The upward cursor operation is an operation of touching the upper area of the touch panel 29. If there is no upward cursor operation (step C505; N), the process proceeds to step C510. When there is an upward cursor operation (step C505; Y), the address of the hole setting item area is prepared (step C506), and the set value after reaching the lower limit is prepared (step C507). Then, a negative update process is performed (step C508), and the hole setting display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C509).

Values are associated with each item, and on the hole setting screen shown in FIG. 77 (a), items are arranged in order from the top with the smallest value. Each time there is an upward cursor operation, items with smaller corresponding values are sequentially selected, and the cursor moves upward on the hole setting screen. again,
If the item with the smallest value is selected (the cursor is on the item displayed at the top of the hole setting screen) and there is an upward cursor operation, the item with the largest value is selected and the hole setting screen. Moves the cursor to the item displayed at the bottom.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a downward cursor operation (step C510). The downward cursor operation is an operation of touching the lower area of the touch panel 29. If there is no downward cursor operation (step C510; N), the process proceeds to step C516.

When there is a downward cursor operation (step C510; Y), the address of the hole setting item area is prepared (step C511), the upper limit value of the hole setting item is prepared (step C512), and after the upper limit is reached. The set value of is prepared (step C513). Then, a plus update process is performed (step C514), and hole setting display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C515).

Each time there is a downward cursor operation, items with large corresponding values are sequentially selected, and the cursor moves downward on the hole setting screen. Also, if the item with the largest value is selected (the cursor is on the item displayed at the bottom of the hole setting screen) and there is a downward cursor operation, the item with the smallest value is selected and the hole is opened. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the top of the setting screen.

After that, the hall volume adjustment process (step C516) in which the volume changeable range is set based on the operation input, and the hall LED in which the LED brightness changeable range is set based on the operation input.
Luminance adjustment processing (step C517) is performed. In these processes, both the upper limit value and the lower limit value may be set, or only one of them may be set. The player can adjust the volume and the brightness of the LED within the range set here. Further, the liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (step C518) in which the liquid crystal brightness is set based on the operation input, and the power saving setting process (step C518) in which the power saving state to be set when the game is not performed for a predetermined time is set based on the operation input. C519
)I do. In this power saving setting process (step C519), the setting of whether or not to enable the power saving setting when the game is not performed for a predetermined time, and the volume, LED brightness, and liquid crystal brightness at the time of the power saving setting are set for each hole. It can be set to. In addition to the above settings, it may be possible to set whether or not to operate the movable accessory during power saving. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in these processes (step C520).

If there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C520; N), the hall setting mode process ends. Further, when there is a setting confirmation operation input (step C520; Y), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation operation input is the factory default setting (step C522). For confirmation operation input,
There are a confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in the processes in steps C516 to C519 and a confirmation operation input for returning to the factory default setting, and it is determined which is performed.

If the confirmation operation input is not the factory default setting (step C521; N), that is, if the confirmation operation input confirms the information set in the processes from steps C516 to C519, the processes from steps C516 to C519 are performed. The determined hole setting data is written to the backup RAM using the information set in step 3 as the determined information (step C523).
.. Further, in the case of the confirmation operation input in the factory default setting (step C521; Y), the factory default setting process (step C522) is performed, the information set in the processes from steps C516 to C519 is discarded, and the factory is used. The initial value at the time of shipment is used as the determined information, and the determined hole setting data is written to the backup RAM (step C523). As a result, PRO
The initial setting values (volume, LED brightness, LCD brightness setting values) stored in M321 are FeR.
It is stored in AM323. After that, the end of the screen drawing in the hole setting mode is set (step C524), the flag in the hole setting mode is cleared (step C525), and the hole setting mode processing is ended.

[Hall volume adjustment process]
FIG. 79 shows the hall volume adjustment process (step C5) in the above-mentioned hall setting mode process.
16) is shown. In this hall volume adjustment process, first, it is determined whether the hall volume can be adjusted (step C531). The hall volume adjustable state is a state in which the volume adjustment item is selected in the hall setting mode and the setting can be changed. If the hall volume adjustment is not possible (step C531; N), the hall volume adjustment process ends. Further, when the hall volume can be adjusted (step C531; Y), it is determined whether there is an operation to lower the volume (step C532). The operation of lowering the volume is an operation of touching the left area of the touch panel 29.

If there is no operation to lower the volume (step C532; N), the process proceeds to step C537. When there is an operation to lower the volume (step C532; Y), the address of the hall volume area is prepared (step C533), and the set value after reaching the lower limit (here, the lower limit value) is prepared (step C534). .. Then, a negative update process is performed (step C535).
The volume meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C536). As a result, the volume is lowered each time there is an operation to lower the volume. In addition, even if there is an operation to lower the volume while the volume is at the minimum, the minimum value remains.

Next, it is determined whether there is an operation to raise the volume (step C537). The operation of raising the volume is an operation of touching the right area of the touch panel 29. If there is no operation to raise the volume (step C537; N), the hall volume adjustment process ends. If there is an operation to raise the volume (step C537; Y), the address of the hall volume area is prepared (step C).
538), prepare the upper limit of the hall volume (step C539), and set the value after reaching the upper limit (step C539).
Here, the upper limit value) is prepared (step C540). Then, a plus update process is performed (step C541), and the volume meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C5).
42). As a result, the volume is increased each time there is an operation to increase the volume. In addition, even if there is an operation to raise the volume while the volume is at the maximum, the maximum value remains.

If there is an operation to lower or raise the volume, the operation sound may be output at the changed volume. Further, the volume of each voice actually output is set in the sound control process (step C18). There are some that do not follow the hall setting values such as error sounds, and the output is set according to the situation.

[Hall LED brightness adjustment processing]
FIG. 80 shows the hall LED brightness adjustment processing (step C517) in the above-mentioned hall setting mode processing. In this hall LED brightness adjustment process, first, it is determined whether the hall LED brightness can be adjusted (step C551). The Hall LED brightness adjustable state is a state in which the LED brightness adjustment item is selected in the Hall setting mode and the setting can be changed. When the Hall LED brightness adjustment is not possible (step C551; N), the Hall LED brightness adjustment process is terminated. Also, when the hall LED brightness can be adjusted (
Step C551; Y) determines whether there is an operation to reduce the brightness (step C552).
.. The operation of lowering the brightness is an operation of touching the left area of the touch panel 29.

If there is no operation for lowering the brightness (step C552; N), the process proceeds to step C557. When there is an operation to lower the luminance (step C552; Y), the address of the Hall LED luminance region is prepared (step C553), and the set value after reaching the lower limit (here, the lower limit value) is prepared (step C554). ). Then, a minus update process is performed (step C55).
5) Set the LED luminance meter display information corresponding to the updated value (step C556).
.. As a result, the brightness is lowered every time there is an operation to lower the brightness. Further, even if there is an operation of lowering the brightness in the state where the brightness is the minimum, the minimum value remains.

Next, it is determined whether there is an operation for increasing the brightness (step C557). The operation of increasing the brightness is an operation of touching the right area of the touch panel 29. If there is no operation to increase the brightness (step C557; N), the Hall LED brightness adjustment process is terminated. When there is an operation to increase the brightness (step C557; Y), the address of the hall LED brightness area is prepared (step C558), the upper limit value of the hall LED brightness is prepared (step C559), and after the upper limit is reached. (Here, the upper limit value) is prepared (step C560). Then, a plus update process is performed (step C561), and the LED luminance meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C562). As a result, the brightness is increased every time there is an operation to increase the brightness. Further, even if there is an operation to increase the brightness in the state where the brightness is maximum, the maximum value remains.

When there is an operation of lowering or increasing the brightness, the LED may be made to emit light with the changed brightness. Further, the brightness to be actually output is set in the decoration control process (step C19). Some of them have brightness that does not follow the Hall setting value, such as light emission at the time of an error, and the output is set according to the situation.

[Player setting mode processing]
FIG. 81 shows the player setting mode process (step C11) in the above-mentioned main process. In this player setting mode processing, first, it is determined whether or not the player is in the player setting mode in which the player sets information (step C571). When the player is in the player setting mode, a flag in the player setting mode is set, and it is possible to determine whether or not the player is in the player setting mode depending on the presence or absence of this flag. When in the player setting mode (step C5)
71; Y) proceeds to step C575.

Further, when the player is not in the player setting mode (step C571; N), it is determined whether the start condition of the player setting mode is satisfied (step C572). The start condition of the player setting mode here is, for example, that the effect button 25 is pressed once while waiting for a customer.
If the start condition of the player setting mode is not satisfied (step C572; N), the player setting mode process is terminated. When the start condition of the player setting mode is satisfied (step C572; Y), the screen drawing start of the player setting mode is set (step C573).
), Set the player setting mode flag (step C574).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an upward cursor operation as a process for selecting an item (step C575). The upward cursor operation is an operation of touching the upper area of the touch panel 29. If there is no upward cursor operation (step C575; N), the process proceeds to step C580. When there is an upward cursor operation (step C575; Y), the address of the player setting item area is prepared (step C576), and the set value after reaching the lower limit is prepared (step C577). Then, a minus update process is performed (step C578), and the player setting display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C579).

A value is associated with each item, and on the player setting screen shown in FIG. 77 (b), the items are arranged in ascending order from the top. Each time there is an upward cursor operation, items with smaller corresponding values are sequentially selected, and the cursor moves upward on the player setting screen. again,
If the item with the smallest value is selected (the cursor is on the item displayed at the top of the player setting screen) and there is an upward cursor operation, the item with the largest value is selected and the player. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the bottom of the setting screen.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a downward cursor operation (step C580). The downward cursor operation is an operation of touching the lower area of the touch panel 29. If there is no downward cursor operation (step C580; N), the process proceeds to step C586.

When there is a downward cursor operation (step C580; Y), the address of the player setting item area is prepared (step C581), the upper limit value of the player setting item is prepared (step C582), and the upper limit is prepared. The set value after reaching is prepared (step C583). Then, a plus update process is performed (step C584), and the player setting display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C585).

Each time there is a downward cursor operation, items with large corresponding values are sequentially selected, and the cursor moves downward on the player setting screen. Also, if the item with the largest value is selected (the cursor is on the item displayed at the bottom of the player setting screen) and there is a downward cursor operation, the item with the smallest value is selected. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the top of the player setting screen.

After that, in the player volume adjustment process (step C586) that changes the volume based on the operation input within the changeable range set in the hall volume adjustment process (step C516), and the hall LED adjustment process (step C517) described above. The player LED brightness adjustment process (step C581) for changing the LED brightness based on the operation input is performed within the set changeable range. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in these processes (step C388).

If there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C388; N), the player setting mode process ends. If there is a setting confirmation operation input (step C388; Y), step C
After storing the information set in 586 and C587 in the RAM 322 as the player setting data, the end of the screen drawing in the player setting mode is set (step C589), and the flag in the player setting mode is cleared (step C590). ), Ends the player setting mode processing. As a result, the brightness and volume of the LED set by the player are changed.

The drawing update setting accompanying the operation input after entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode is performed in the effect button input process (step C9). In addition, the player setting data is stored in RAM3.
Although it is supposed to be stored in 22, it may be stored in FeRAM 323. Further, the time is acquired from the RTC 338 when the power is turned off and stored in the FeRAM 322, the power cutoff time is calculated from the time acquired from the RTC 338 when the power is turned on, and F is set according to the power cutoff time.
It may be decided whether or not to store the hole set value data in the player setting data stored in the eRAM 323. For example, if the power cutoff time is within a predetermined time, the hall setting value data is not stored in the player setting data and is maintained as it is, and the power is cut off to recover from a short-time power failure or error. Can prevent the player setting data from being reset.

[Player volume adjustment process]
FIG. 82 shows the player volume adjustment process (step C5) in the above-mentioned player setting mode process.
86) was shown. In this player volume adjustment process, first, it is determined whether or not the player volume can be adjusted (step C601). The player volume adjustable state is a state in which the volume adjustment item is selected in the player setting mode and the setting can be changed. When the player volume adjustment is not possible (step C601; N), the player volume adjustment process ends. Further, when the player volume can be adjusted (step C601; Y), it is determined whether there is an operation to lower the volume (step C602). The operation of lowering the volume is an operation of touching the left area of the touch panel 29.

If there is no operation to lower the volume (step C602; N), the process proceeds to step C607. If there is an operation to lower the volume (step C602; Y), the address of the player volume area is prepared (step C603), and the set value after reaching the lower limit (here, the lower limit value) is prepared (step C604). ). Then, a minus update process is performed (step C605).
The volume meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C606). As a result, the volume is lowered each time there is an operation to lower the volume. In addition, even if there is an operation to lower the volume while the volume is at the minimum, the minimum value remains.

Next, it is determined whether there is an operation to raise the volume (step C607). The operation of raising the volume is an operation of touching the right area of the touch panel 29. If there is no operation to raise the volume (step C607; N), the player volume adjustment process ends. If there is an operation to raise the volume (step C607; Y), the address of the player volume area is prepared (step C).
608), prepare the upper limit value of the player volume (step C609), and set the value after reaching the upper limit (step C609).
Here, the upper limit value) is prepared (step C610). Then, a plus update process is performed (step C611), and the volume meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C6).
12). As a result, the volume is increased each time there is an operation to increase the volume. In addition, even if there is an operation to raise the volume while the volume is at the maximum, the maximum value remains.

If there is an operation to lower or raise the volume, the operation sound may be output at the changed volume. Further, the volume of each voice actually output is set in the sound control process (step C18). There are some that do not follow the player setting values such as error sounds, and the output is set according to the situation.

[Player LED brightness adjustment processing]
FIG. 83 shows the player LED brightness adjustment process (step C587) in the above-mentioned player setting mode process. In this player LED brightness adjustment process, first, it is determined whether or not the player LED brightness can be adjusted (step C621). The player LED brightness adjustable state is a state in which the LED brightness adjustment item is selected in the player setting mode and the setting can be changed. When the player LED brightness adjustment is not possible (step C621; N), the player LED brightness adjustment process is terminated. Also, when the player LED brightness can be adjusted (
Step C621; Y) determines whether there is an operation to reduce the brightness (step C622).
.. The operation of lowering the brightness is an operation of touching the left area of the touch panel 29.

If there is no operation for lowering the brightness (step C622; N), the process proceeds to step C627. When there is an operation to lower the brightness (step C622; Y), the address of the player LED brightness area is prepared (step C623), and the set value after reaching the lower limit (here, the lower limit value) is prepared (step). C624). Then, a minus update process is performed (step C62).
5) Set the LED luminance meter display information corresponding to the updated value (step C626).
.. As a result, the brightness is lowered every time there is an operation to lower the brightness. Further, even if there is an operation of lowering the brightness in the state where the brightness is the minimum, the minimum value remains.

Next, it is determined whether there is an operation for increasing the brightness (step C627). The operation of increasing the brightness is an operation of touching the right area of the touch panel 29. When there is no operation for increasing the brightness (step C627; N), the player LED brightness adjustment process is terminated. When there is an operation to increase the brightness (step C627; Y), the address of the player LED brightness area is prepared (step C628), the upper limit value of the player LED brightness is prepared (step C629), and the upper limit is prepared. The set value (here, the upper limit value) after reaching is prepared (step C630). Then, a plus update process is performed (step C631), and the LED luminance meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C632). As a result, the brightness is increased every time there is an operation to increase the brightness. Further, even if there is an operation to increase the brightness in the state where the brightness is maximum, the maximum value remains.

When there is an operation of lowering or increasing the brightness, the LED may be made to emit light with the changed brightness. Further, the brightness to be actually output is set in the decoration control process (step C19). Some of the brightness does not follow the player's set value, such as light emission at the time of an error, and the output is set according to the situation.

[Minus update process]
FIG. 84 shows negative update processing (steps C508, C535) in the above-mentioned hall setting mode processing, hall volume adjustment processing, hall LED brightness adjustment processing, player setting mode processing, player volume adjustment processing, and player LED brightness adjustment processing. , C555, C578, C605,
C625) is shown. In this negative update process, first, the contents of the update area are loaded (step C641), the loaded value is updated by -1 (step C642), and the updated value is 0.
It is determined whether it is smaller (step C643).

If the updated value is not less than 0 (step C643; N), the updated value is saved in the update area (step C645), and the minus update process is terminated. If the updated value is less than 0 (step C643; Y), the set value after reaching the lower limit is set as the updated value (step C644), and the updated value is saved in the update area (step C644). Step C645
), Ends the minus update process.

[Plus update process]
FIG. 85 shows plus update processing (steps C514, C541) in the above-mentioned hall setting mode processing, hall volume adjustment processing, hall LED brightness adjustment processing, player setting mode processing, player volume adjustment processing, and player LED brightness adjustment processing. , C561, C584, C611, C
631) was shown. In this plus update process, first, the contents of the update area are loaded (step C651), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step C652), and it is determined whether the updated value is larger than the upper limit value (step C653). ..

If the updated value is not larger than the upper limit value (step C653; N), the updated value is saved in the update area (step C655), and the plus update process is terminated. If the updated value is larger than the upper limit value (step C653; Y), the set value after reaching the upper limit is set as the updated value (step C654), and the updated value is saved in the update area. (Step C
655), the plus update process is terminated.

86 to 97 are a program list showing a part of the program structure of the game control program executed by the CPU 111A of the game control device 100. Each program list is 8
It is a list of instructions in assembly language (source code) corresponding to Z80, which is a bit microprocessor, and ROM111 except for pseudo instructions (instructions for assembler).
There is a one-to-one correspondence with machine language instructions (machine codes) stored in b (game control program storage means).

From the left side, the description of the instruction (code) in each program list is the "line number" attached for convenience, the "mnemonic" indicating the operation content (operation content) of the instruction, the "operand" of the instruction target, and the convenience of explanation. It is divided into "comments" attached for. The instructions in the program list are basically executed from the top to the bottom of the program list in the order of line numbers (from small to large) unless there is an instruction to call a subroutine or a jump instruction (branch instruction).

FIG. 86 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special figure 1 game process (FIG. 19). The special figure 1 game process corresponds to the label “P_T1GAME_PRC” and is called in step X112 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

The code at line numbers 1010 and 1020 corresponds to the process in step Y99 and is at line number 1040.
The code from 1080 corresponds to the processing of steps Y100 to Y102, and the line number 1100
The code from 1150 corresponds to the processing of steps Y103 and Y104.

Further, the codes of line numbers 1170 to 1210 correspond to the processing of steps Y105 to Y108. The code of line number 1180 corresponds to the process of step Y105, and loads the start address D_T1GAME of the special figure 1 game sequence branch table into the HL register. The code at line number 1190 corresponds to the process of step Y106 and loads the numerical value corresponding to the label R_T1SEQCB into the A register. Label R_T1SEQCB is RAM111c
1 shows an address for storing the game processing number in Special Figure 1. The code at line number 1200 corresponds to the process of step Y107 and calls the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD. The code at line number 1210 corresponds to the process of step Y108, and calls the subroutine corresponding to the value of the HL register in which the return value from the 2-byte data acquisition process is stored.

FIG. 87 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special figure 2 game processing (FIGS. 20 and 21). Special figure 2 game processing corresponds to the label "P_T2GAME_PRC",
It is called in step X113 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

The codes of line numbers 1310 and 1320 correspond to the processing of step Y130, and the code of line numbers 134 corresponds to the process.
The codes 0 and 1350 correspond to the processes of steps Y131 and Y132. Also, line number 1
The codes from 370 to 1420 correspond to the processing of steps Y133 and Y134, and the line number 14
The codes 40 to 1490 correspond to the processing of steps Y135 to Y137.

Further, the codes of line numbers 1510 to 1550 correspond to the processing of steps Y138 to Y140. The code at line number 1520 corresponds to the process of step Y138, and loads the start address D_T2GAME of the special figure 2 game sequence branch table into the HL register. The code at line number 1530 corresponds to the process of step Y139 and loads the numerical value corresponding to the label R_T2SEQCB into the A register. Label R_T2SEQCB is RAM111c
2 shows an address for storing the game processing number. The code at line number 1540 corresponds to the process of step Y140 and calls the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD. The code at line number 1550 corresponds to the process of step Y141, and calls the subroutine corresponding to the value of the HL register in which the return value from the 2-byte data acquisition process is stored.

FIG. 88 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of fanfare / interval processing (FIG. 42). Fanfare / interval processing is labeled "P_TFAN"
Is called in steps Y112 and Y145 of the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process.

The codes of line numbers 1610 and 1620 correspond to the processing of step Y939, and the lines of line numbers 164
The codes of 0 and 1650 correspond to the processing of step Y940, and the codes of line numbers 1670 and 1680 correspond to the processing of step Y941.

The codes of line numbers 1700 to 1750 correspond to the processing of steps Y942 to Y946. The code of line number 1710 corresponds to the process of step Y942, and loads the start address D_ROUND_MAX of the round number upper limit table into the HL register. Line number 172
The code of 0 corresponds to the processing of step Y943, and in, the numerical value corresponding to the label R_ROUND_FLG is loaded into the A register. The label R_ROUND_FLG is RAM 11
An address for storing the round number upper limit value information in 1c is shown. The code at line number 1730 corresponds to the process of step Y944 and calls the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD.

The code at line number 1740 corresponds to the process of step Y945 and stores the value of the L register in the area of RAM 111c indicated by the label R_ROUND_MAX. Label R_ROU
ND_MAX indicates the start address of the round number upper limit value area in the RAM 111c.
The code at line number 1750 corresponds to the processing in step Y946 and labels the value of the H register R.
It is stored in the area of RAM 111c represented by _ROUND_PNT. Label R_ROUN
D_PNT indicates the start address of the round LED pointer area in the RAM 111c. The codes of line numbers 1770 to 1790 correspond to the processing of steps Y947 to Y949, and the codes of line numbers 1810 and 1820 correspond to the processing of step Y950.

FIG. 89 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the normal figure game process (FIG. 50). The normal figure game processing corresponds to the label "P_FGAME", and the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 1).
It is called in step X114 of 1).

The code of line numbers 1910 and 1920 corresponds to the processing of steps B1 and B2, and the line number 19
The codes from 40 to 1980 correspond to the processes of steps B3 and B4. Also, line number 200
The codes from 0 to 2040 correspond to the processes of steps B5 to B7. The code of line number 2010 corresponds to the process of step B5, and loads the start address D_FGAME of the normal figure game sequence branch table into the HL register. The code of line number 2020 corresponds to the process of step B6, and loads the numerical value corresponding to the label R_FSEQUCB into the A register. The label R_FSEQCB indicates an address in the RAM 111c for storing the game processing number.

The code at line number 2030 corresponds to the process of step B7 and is labeled P_GET_WORD.
Call the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to. The code for line number 2040 is step B8.
Corresponds to the processing of, and calls the subroutine corresponding to the value of the HL register in which the return value from the 2-byte data acquisition processing is stored.

FIG. 90 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the process during display of the normal map (FIG. 51). The process during display of the normal map corresponds to the label "P_FDISP" and is called in step B11 of the normal map game process.

The code of line numbers 2110 and 2120 corresponds to the processing of steps B501 and B502, and the code of line numbers 2140 and 2150 corresponds to the processing of step B503. Also, line number 2
The codes 170 to 2270 correspond to the processing of steps B504 to B512. The code of line number 2180 corresponds to the processing of step B504, hits the HL register, and loads the start address D_FOPEN_PNT of the intermediate processing setting table. The code at line number 2190 corresponds to the process of step B505 and loads the numerical value corresponding to the label R_FZ_INF into the A register. The label R_FZ_INF indicates an address in the RAM 111c for storing the normal figure stop symbol information. The code at line number 2200 corresponds to the process of step B506.
Call the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD.

The code of line number 2210 corresponds to the process of step B507, and stores the value of the L register in the area of RAM 111c indicated by the label R_FTBL_CTL. Label R_FTBL
_CTL indicates the start address of the control pointer area in the RAM 111c. The code of line number 2220 corresponds to the process of step B508, and stores the value of the H register in the area of the address next to the start address of the control pointer area in the normal diagram indicated by the label R_FTBL_CTL.

The code of line number 2240 corresponds to the processing of step Y509, the start address D_FOPEN_TIM of the normal power release time table is loaded in the HL register, the code of line number 2250 corresponds to the predetermined value of step Y510, and the numerical value corresponding to the label R_FZ_INF. Is loaded into the A register. The label R_FZ_INF indicates an address in the RAM 111c for storing the normal figure stop symbol information. The code at line number 2260 corresponds to the process of step Y511 and calls the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD. The code of line number 2270 corresponds to the processing of step Y512, and the value of the HL register in which the return value from the 2-byte data acquisition processing is stored is indicated by the label R_FSEQUCB. Store in the area of.

FIG. 91 is a program list showing the program structure of the 2-byte data acquisition process (FIG. 52). The 2-byte data acquisition process corresponds to the label "P_GET_WORD", and the special figure 1
Steps Y107, Y140, Y944, B7, B506, B511 for game processing, special figure 2 game processing, fanfare / interval processing, normal map game processing, and normal map display processing.
Called at.

The code at line number 2310 corresponds to the process of step Y971 and doubles the value in the A register. The value after the calculation is stored in the WA register. The code at line number 2320 is step Y97.
Corresponding to the process of 2, the value of the WA register is added to the address stored in the HL register. The code of line number 2340 corresponds to the process of step Y973, and loads the address corresponding to the value of the HL register and the value stored in the address +1 to the address into the HL register. Then, the line number 2360 returns to the processing of the caller.

That is, there are two arguments to the 2-byte data acquisition process, and they are stored in the same register (here, the A register and the HL register) regardless of which process is called.
In addition, the return value from the 2-byte data acquisition process is one, and no matter which process is called, the return value is put in the same register (here, the HL register) and returned to the original process. ing.

FIG. 92 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the symbol variation control process (FIG. 53). The symbol variation control process corresponds to the label "P_ZGR_CTL" and is called in steps Y117, Y154, and B16 of the special figure 1 game process, the special figure 2 game process, and the normal figure game process.

The codes of line numbers 2430 to 2460 correspond to the processing of steps Y1401 to Y1403. Further, the codes of line numbers 2480 and 2490 correspond to the processing of step Y1404. At line number 2480, the value of the HL register is updated by +1 to make it the address of the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the target symbol, and at line number 2490, the address stored in the HL register and the address are +1. Load the address value into the HL register. As a result, the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired.

The codes of line numbers 2510 to 2530 correspond to the processing of steps Y1405 and Y1406. The code of line number 2510 corresponds to the processing of step Y1405, the value of the DE register is updated by -1, and it becomes the address of the target blinking control timer area, and the code of line number 2520 corresponds to the processing of step Y1406 and the label. Call the 1-byte subtraction process corresponding to P_DEC_BYTE. The code at line number 2530 corresponds to the process of step Y1407.

The code of line number 2550 corresponds to the process of step Y1408, and saves the initial value of the blinking control timer (the numerical value corresponding to the label C_ZGR_TIM) in the area corresponding to the address stored in the DE register (blinking control timer area). The code of line number 2570 corresponds to the process of step Y1409, and the value of the DE register is updated by -1 to be the address of the target variable symbol number area. The code of line number 2580 corresponds to the process of step Y1410, and loads the variable symbol number upper limit determination value (numerical value corresponding to label C_ZGR_MAX) into the B register. The code at line number 2590 corresponds to the process of step Y1411 and is labeled P_INC.
Call the 1-byte addition process corresponding to _BYTE.

FIG. 93 is a program list showing the program structure of the 1-byte subtraction process (FIG. 54). The 1-byte subtraction process corresponds to the label "P_DEC_BYTE", and the special figure 1 game process,
It is called in step Y1406 of the symbol variation control process called in steps Y117, Y154, and B16 of the special figure 2 game process and the ordinary figure game process, respectively.

The codes at line numbers 2710 and 2720 correspond to the processing in step Y1421. Line number 2
In 710, the value of the address stored in the DE register is loaded into the A register. D
The address of the target blinking control timer area is stored in the E register. Line number 2720
Then, if the value of the A register is 0, the process returns to the caller's process.

The codes of line numbers 2730 and 2740 correspond to the processing of step Y1422, and the line numbers 27
At 30, the value of the A register is updated by -1, and at line number 2740, the value of the A register is saved in the area of the address stored in the DE register. As a result, the value of the target blinking control timer area is updated by -1.

FIG. 94 is a program list showing the program structure of the 1-byte addition process (FIG. 55). The 1-byte addition process corresponds to the label "P_INC_BYTE", and the special figure 1 game process,
It is called in step Y1411 of the symbol variation control process called in steps Y117, Y154, and B16 of the special figure 2 game process and the normal figure game process, respectively.

The code at line number 2810 corresponds to the process of step Y1431 and loads the value of the address stored in the DE register into the A register. The address of the target variable symbol number area is stored in the DE register. The code at line number 2820 corresponds to the process of step Y1432 and updates the value of the A register by -1.

The codes of line numbers 2830 to 2860 correspond to the processing of steps Y1433 and Y1434. At line number 2830, the value of the A register and the value of the B register are compared. The variable symbol number upper limit determination value is stored in the B register. In line number 2840, if the value of the A register is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to the process after line number 2880. If the value of the A register is the upper limit, the code of line number 2860 is executed. The code at line number 2860 corresponds to the process of step Y1434, and by exclusive-ORing the values of the A registers, the value of the A register is cleared to 0.

The code of line numbers 2880 and 2890 corresponds to the process of step Y1435, and saves the value of the A register in the area of the address stored in the DE register. As a result, the value of the target variable symbol number area is updated.

FIG. 95 is a program list showing the program structure of the effect command setting process (FIG. 56). The effect command setting process corresponds to the label "P_SBCOM_SET" and is called in each process executed during the timer interrupt process.

The code of line number 3010 corresponds to the process of step X601, and loads the numerical value from the port C_TXSTS0 in which the status of the serial transmission buffer for effect is stored into the A register. The codes of line numbers 3020 to 3040 correspond to the processing of step X602. At line number 3020, the logical product of the value of the A register and 3FH is taken, and at line number 3030, the value of the A register and 20H are compared. Then, in line number 3040, when the calculation result of line number 3030 is zero (Z) (that is, when the transmission buffer is full), the instruction returns to line number 3010.
When the operation result of line number 3030 is not zero (Z) (that is, when the transmission buffer is not full), the instructions after line number 3060 are executed.

The codes at line numbers 3060 and 3070 correspond to the processing of step X603. Line number 30
At 60, the value of the B register is loaded into the A register. Command data in the B register (
MODE) is stored. At line number 3070, the command data (MODE) stored in the A register is stored in C_TXBUF0 (serial transmission buffer 0).

The code of line number 3100 corresponds to the process of step X604, and loads the numerical value from the port C_TXSTS0 in which the status of the serial transmission buffer for effect is stored into the A register. The codes of line numbers 3110 to 3130 correspond to the processing of step X605. At line number 3110, the logical product of the value of the A register and 3FH is taken, and at line number 3120, the value of the A register and 20H are compared. Then, in line number 3130, when the operation result of line number 3120 is zero (Z) (that is, when the transmission buffer is full), the instruction returns to line number 3100.
When the operation result of line number 3120 is not zero (Z) (that is, when the transmission buffer is not full), the instructions after line number 3150 are executed.

The code at line numbers 3150 and 3160 corresponds to the process of step X606. Line number 31
At 50, the value of the B register is loaded into the A register. Command data in the B register (
ACTION) is stored. At line number 3160, the command data (ACTION) stored in the A register is stored in C_TXBUF0 (serial transmission buffer 0).
Line number 3180 returns to the caller's processing.

FIG. 96 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the process during display (FIG. 57) of the special figure 1 given as a modification. The process during display of the special figure 1 corresponds to the label “P_T1DISP” and is called in step Y111 of the special figure 1 game process.

The code at line numbers 3210 and 3220 corresponds to the processing of steps Y751 and Y752.
At line number 3210, the value of the A register is cleared to 0 by exclusive-ORing the values of the A registers. At line number 3220, the jackpot flag 1 is loaded into the A register and the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared by exchanging the value of the jackpot flag 1 area (the numerical value corresponding to R_T1HIT_FLG) with the A register.

The code at line numbers 3240 and 3250 corresponds to the process of step Y753. Line number 32
At 40, the value of the A register is compared with the jackpot determination value (value of C_THIT_FLG), and at line number 3250, P_T1D when the special figure 1 is not a jackpot (does not match the jackpot determination value).
Move to the process corresponding to ISP_10.

The codes of line numbers 3280 and 3290 correspond to the processing of step Y754 and set the test signal. The codes of line numbers 3310 to 3350 correspond to the processing of steps Y942 to Y946. This process is the same as line numbers 1710 to 1750 in FIG. 88.

The code at line number 3310 corresponds to the process of step Y942, and loads the start address D_ROUND_MAX of the round number upper limit table into the HL register. Line number 3320
Code corresponds to the process of step Y943, and in, the numerical value corresponding to the label R_ROUND_FLG is loaded into the A register. Label R_ROUND_FLG is RAM111
In c, the address which stores the round number upper limit value information is shown. The code at line number 3330 corresponds to the process of step Y944 and calls the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD.

The code of line number 3340 corresponds to the process of step Y945, and stores the value of the L register in the area of RAM 111c indicated by the label R_ROUND_MAX. Label R_ROU
ND_MAX indicates the start address of the round number upper limit value area in the RAM 111c.
The code at line number 3350 corresponds to the process of step Y946 and labels the value of the H register R.
It is stored in the area of RAM 111c represented by _ROUND_PNT. Label R_ROUN
D_PNT indicates the start address of the round LED pointer area in the RAM 111c.

FIG. 97 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the process during display (FIG. 58) of the special figure 2 given as a modification. The process during display of the special figure 2 corresponds to the label “P_T2DISP” and is called in step Y144 of the special figure 2 game process.

It is almost the same as the processing during display of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 96, the codes of line numbers 3410 and 3420 correspond to the processing of steps Y813 and Y814, and the codes of line numbers 3440 and 3450 correspond to the processing of step Y815. .. The code for line numbers 3480 and 3490 is step Y8.
Corresponding to the processing of 16, the code of line numbers 3510 to 3550 corresponds to steps Y942 to Y9.
Corresponds to the processing of 46.

The code at line number 3510 corresponds to the process of step Y942, and loads the start address D_ROUND_MAX of the round number upper limit table into the HL register. Line number 3520
Code corresponds to the process of step Y943, and in, the numerical value corresponding to the label R_ROUND_FLG is loaded into the A register. Label R_ROUND_FLG is RAM111
In c, the address which stores the round number upper limit value information is shown. The code at line number 3530 corresponds to the process of step Y944 and calls the 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD.

The code of line number 3540 corresponds to the process of step Y945, and stores the value of the L register in the area of RAM 111c indicated by the label R_ROUND_MAX. Label R_ROU
ND_MAX indicates the start address of the round number upper limit value area in the RAM 111c.
The code at line number 3550 corresponds to the process of step Y946 and labels the value of the H register R.
It is stored in the area of RAM 111c represented by _ROUND_PNT. Label R_ROUN
D_PNT indicates the start address of the round LED pointer area in the RAM 111c.

98 to 108 show a program list showing a register structure for the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 and a part of the program structure of the game control program executed by the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300. Each program list is a list of instructions in assembly language (source code) corresponding to the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300, and is stored in the PROM 321 (game control program storage means) except for pseudo instructions (commands to the assembler) and the like. There is a one-to-one correspondence with machine language instructions (machine codes).

FIG. 98 shows the structure of the register for the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300.
The CPU 311 is provided with eight 32-bit size registers ER0 to ER7. Each of these registers can also be used as a 16-bit size or 8-bit size register. For example, ER0 is 16-bit size E0 and R0 (R0H + R0L).
It can also be used as R0L and R0H of 8-bit size.

ER0 to ER7, E0 to E7, R0 to R7, R0H to R07 and R0L to R
Each code of 7L forms a code attached to identify each of the plurality of registers. In the following description, for convenience, these codes are referred to as register addresses, the register whose number part is 0 is the register of the start address, and the address value increases in the order in which the value of the number part increases. .. Of course, the signing method and order are not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the order may be determined in alphabetical order, or the order and address of each register may be determined separately from the numbers of the attached codes and the alphabetical order.

FIG. 99 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the hall setting mode processing (FIG. 78). Hall setting mode processing corresponds to the label "_p_hall_menu" and is the main processing (
It is called in step C10 in FIG. 63).

The codes of line numbers 5000 to 5020 correspond to the processing of steps C506 to C508. The code of line number 5000 corresponds to step C506, and the address of the hole setting item area is set in the ER0 register in a 32-bit size. The code of line number 5010 corresponds to step C507, and 9 is set in the R1L register as an 8-bit size as a setting value after reaching the lower limit. The code at line number 5020 corresponds to step C508 and is labeled "_p_downcount".
Call the negative update process corresponding to. The return value from this negative update process is R.
It is returned in the 0L register, and in the processing corresponding to the subsequent step C509, the processing is performed using the value of the R0L register.

The codes of line numbers 5100 to 5130 correspond to the processing of steps C511 to C514. The code of line number 5100 corresponds to step C511, and the address of the hole setting item area is set in the ER0 register in a 32-bit size. The code of line number 5110 corresponds to step C512, and 9 is set in the R1L register as an upper limit value of the hole setting item with an 8-bit size. The code of line number 5120 corresponds to step C513, and 0 is set in the R1H register as an 8-bit size as a setting value after reaching the upper limit. The code at line number 5130 corresponds to step C514 and calls the plus update process corresponding to the label "_p_upcount". The return value from this plus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the process corresponding to the subsequent step C515, the process is performed using the value of the R0L register.

FIG. 100 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the hall volume adjustment process (FIG. 79). The hall volume adjustment process corresponds to the label "_p_hall_sndvol" and is called in step C516 in the hall setting mode process (FIG. 78).

The codes at line numbers 5500 to 5520 correspond to the processing of steps C533 to C535. The code at line number 5500 corresponds to step C533 and sets the address of the hall volume area in the ER0 register with a 32-bit size. The code at line number 5510 is in step C5.
Corresponding to 34, 0 is set in the R1L register with an 8-bit size as a setting value after reaching the lower limit. The code at line number 5520 corresponds to step C535 and calls the minus update process corresponding to the label "_p_downcount". The return value from this negative update process is R0L.
It is returned in a register, and in the processing corresponding to the subsequent step C536, the processing is performed using the value of the R0L register.

The codes of line numbers 5600 to 5630 correspond to the processing of steps C538 to C541. The code at line number 5600 corresponds to step C538 and sets the address of the hall volume area in the ER0 register in a 32-bit size. The code at line number 5610 is in step C5.
Corresponding to 39, 9 is set in the R1L register with an 8-bit size as the upper limit of the hall volume. The code at line number 5620 corresponds to step C540 and is set to 9 after reaching the upper limit.
Is set in the R1H register with an 8-bit size. The code at line number 5630 is in step C5.
Corresponds to 41, and calls the plus update process corresponding to the label "_p_upcount". The return value from this plus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the process corresponding to the subsequent step C542, the process is performed using the value of the R0L register.

FIG. 101 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the Hall LED luminance adjustment process (FIG. 80). Hall LED brightness adjustment processing corresponds to the label "_p_hall_ledvol",
Called in step C517 in the hall setting mode process (FIG. 78).

The codes at line numbers 5700 to 5720 correspond to the processing of steps C553 to C555. The code at line number 5700 corresponds to step C553 and sets the address of the Hall LED luminance region in the ER0 register with a 32-bit size. The code of line number 5710 corresponds to step C554, and 0 is set in the R1L register as an 8-bit size as a setting value after reaching the lower limit. The code at line number 5720 corresponds to step C555 and is labeled "_p_downcount".
Invokes the negative update process corresponding to ". The return value from this negative update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the process corresponding to the subsequent step C556, the process is performed using the value of the R0L register.

The codes at line numbers 5800 to 5830 correspond to the processing of steps C558 to C561. The code at line number 5800 corresponds to step C558 and sets the address of the Hall LED luminance region in the ER0 register with a 32-bit size. The code at line number 5810 corresponds to step C599 and sets 9 as the upper limit of the Hall LED luminance in the R1L register in 8-bit size. The code of line number 5820 corresponds to step C560, and 9 is set in the R1H register as an 8-bit size as a setting value after reaching the upper limit. The code at line number 5830 corresponds to step C561 and calls the plus update process corresponding to the label "_p_upcount". The return value from this plus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the process corresponding to the subsequent step C562, the process is performed using the value of the R0L register.

FIG. 102 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the player setting mode processing (FIG. 81). The player setting mode process corresponds to the label "_p_player_menu" and is called in step C11 in the main process (FIG. 63).

The codes of line numbers 6000 to 6020 correspond to the processing of steps C576 to C578. The code of line number 6000 corresponds to step C576, and the address of the player setting item area is set in the ER0 register in a 32-bit size. The code of line number 6010 corresponds to step C577, and 2 is set in the R1L register as an 8-bit size as a setting value after reaching the lower limit. The code at line number 6020 corresponds to step C578 and is labeled "_p_downcount".
Call the negative update process corresponding to. The return value from this negative update process is R.
It is returned in the 0L register, and in the processing corresponding to the subsequent step C579, the processing is performed using the value of the R0L register.

The codes of line numbers 6100 to 6130 correspond to the processing of steps C581 to C584. The code of line number 6100 corresponds to step C581, and the address of the player setting item area is set in the ER0 register in a 32-bit size. The code of line number 6110 corresponds to step C582, and 2 is set in the R1L register as an upper limit value of the player setting item with an 8-bit size. The code of line number 6120 corresponds to step C583, and 0 is set in the R1H register as an 8-bit size as a setting value after reaching the upper limit. The code at line number 6130 corresponds to step C584 and calls the plus update process corresponding to the label "_p_upcount". The return value from this plus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the process corresponding to the subsequent step C585, the process is performed using the value of the R0L register.

FIG. 103 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the player volume adjustment process (FIG. 82). The player volume adjustment process corresponds to the label "_p_player_sndvol" and is called in step C586 in the player setting mode process (FIG. 81).

The codes at line numbers 6200 to 6220 correspond to the processing of steps C603 to C605. The code at line number 6200 corresponds to step C603 and sets the address of the player volume area in the ER0 register in a 32-bit size. The code at line number 6210 is step C6.
Corresponding to 04, 0 is set in the R1L register with an 8-bit size as a setting value after reaching the lower limit. The code at line number 6220 corresponds to step C605 and calls the minus update process corresponding to the label "_p_downcount". The return value from this negative update process is R0L.
It is returned in a register, and in the processing corresponding to the subsequent step C606, the processing is performed using the value of the R0L register.

The codes at line numbers 6300 to 6330 correspond to the processing of steps C608 to C611. The code at line number 6300 corresponds to step C608 and sets the address of the player volume area in the ER0 register in a 32-bit size. The code at line number 6310 is in step C6.
Corresponding to 09, 9 is set in the R1L register with an 8-bit size as the upper limit value of the player volume. The code at line number 6320 corresponds to step C610 and is set to 9 after reaching the upper limit.
Is set in the R1H register with an 8-bit size. The code at line number 6330 is in step C6.
Corresponds to 11 and calls the plus update process corresponding to the label "_p_upcount". The return value from this plus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the process corresponding to the subsequent step C612, the process is performed using the value of the R0L register.

FIG. 104 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the player LED brightness adjustment process (FIG. 83). The player LED brightness adjustment process corresponds to the label "_p_player_ledvol" and is called in step C587 in the player setting mode process (FIG. 81).

The codes at lines 6400 to 6420 correspond to the processing of steps C623 to C625. The code of line number 6400 corresponds to step C623 and sets the address of the player LED luminance region in the ER0 register in a 32-bit size. The code of line number 6410 corresponds to step C624, and 0 is set in the R1L register as an 8-bit size as a setting value after reaching the lower limit. The code at line number 6420 corresponds to step C625 and is labeled "_p_downcount".
Invokes the negative update process corresponding to ". The return value from this negative update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the process corresponding to the subsequent step C626, the process is performed using the value of the R0L register.

The codes at line numbers 6500 to 6530 correspond to the processing of steps C628 to C631. The code at line number 6500 corresponds to step C628 and sets the address of the player LED luminance region in the ER0 register in a 32-bit size. The code of line number 6510 corresponds to step C629, and 9 is set in the R1L register as an upper limit value of the player LED brightness in an 8-bit size. The code of line number 6520 corresponds to step C630, and 9 is set in the R1H register as an 8-bit size as a setting value after reaching the upper limit. The code at line number 6530 corresponds to step C631 and calls the plus update process corresponding to the label "_p_upcount". The return value from this plus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the process corresponding to the subsequent step C632, the process is performed using the value of the R0L register.

FIG. 105 is a program list showing the program structure of the minus update process (FIG. 84). The negative update process corresponds to the label "_p_downcount", and is negative in the above-mentioned hall setting mode processing, hall volume adjustment processing, hall LED brightness adjustment processing, player setting mode processing, player volume adjustment processing, and player LED brightness adjustment processing. Update process (step C508)
, C535, C555, C578, C605, C625).

The codes at line numbers 7000 and 7010 correspond to step C641. In line number 7000, the value of the ER2 register is saved in the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER7 register, and in line number 7010, R2L is saved from the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER0 register.
Load the value into the register. As a result, the value corresponding to the currently selected item is loaded in the R2L register. The code at line number 7020 corresponds to step C642 and is R2L.
Update the register value by -1.

The codes of line numbers 7030 to 7040 correspond to the processing of steps C643 and C644. In line number 7030, if the value of the updated R2L register is 0 or more, that is, within the range of the value corresponding to the item, the processing after line number 7050 corresponding to label L1234 is performed. The code of line number 7040 corresponds to the process of step C644, and when the determination result at line number 7030 is less than 0, that is, when it is out of the range of the value corresponding to the item, the set value after reaching the lower limit is stored. The value of the R1L register is stored in the R2L register.

The code of line numbers 7050 to 7070 corresponds to the processing of step C645, and the line number 70 corresponds to the process.
In 60, the value corresponding to the updated item stored in the R2L register is stored in the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER0 register. At line number 7070, the value of the R2L register is stored in the R0L register. After that, at line number 7080, the saved ER2 information is restored and the process returns to the caller's process.

FIG. 106 is a program list showing the program structure of the plus update process (FIG. 85). The plus update process corresponds to the label "_p_upcount", and is a plus in the above-mentioned hall setting mode processing, hall volume adjustment processing, hall LED brightness adjustment processing, player setting mode processing, player volume adjustment processing, and player LED brightness adjustment processing. Update process (steps C514, C54
1, C561, C584, C611, C631).

The codes at line numbers 7100 and 7110 correspond to step C651. In line number 7100, the value of the ER2 register is saved in the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER7 register, and in line number 7110, R2L is saved from the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER0 register.
Load the value into the register. As a result, the value corresponding to the currently selected item is loaded in the R2L register. The code at line number 7120 corresponds to step C652 and is R2L.
Update the register value by +1.

The codes of line numbers 7130 to 7150 correspond to the processing of steps C653 and C654. In line number 7130, the value of the R1L register in which the upper limit is stored is compared with the value of the R2L register, and in line number 7140, if the comparison result is within the range of the value corresponding to the item, the label L234 is used.
The processing after the line number 7160 corresponding to 5 is performed. The code for line number 7150 is step C6
Corresponding to the processing of 54, when the comparison result at line number 7140 is out of the range of the value corresponding to the item, the value of the R1H register in which the set value after reaching the upper limit is stored is stored in the R2L register.

The codes in line numbers 7160 to 7180 correspond to the processing in step C655, and line numbers 71.
In 70, the value corresponding to the updated item stored in the R2L register is stored in the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER0 register. At line number 7180, the value of the R2L register is stored in the R0L register. After that, at line number 7190, the saved ER2 information is restored and the process returns to the caller's process.

FIG. 107 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of random number processing. The random number processing corresponds to the label "_rand", and the random number update processing in the above-mentioned main processing (step C12).
It is a process to generate a random number.

Line number 7200 loads the value from the random number seed area "_r_rand_seed" into the ER0 register, and line number 7210 loads the hexadecimal value of 41C64E6D into the ER1 register. At line number 7230, the value of the ER1 register is multiplied by the value of the ER0 register and the result is stored in the ER0 register.

After that, various operations are performed, and at line number 7260, the value of the ER1 register is subtracted from the value of the ER1 register and stored in the ER1 register, and at line number 7270, the value of 80 in hexadecimal is stored in the R1H register. At line number 7280, the range correction process corresponding to the label "_hosei" is called. At line number 7290, the value of the R1 register in which the return value from the range correction process is stored is stored in the R0 register, and at line number 7300, the process returns to the random number update process of the caller.

FIG. 108 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the range correction process. The range correction process corresponds to the label "_hosei" and is called in the above-mentioned random number process to correct the range of random numbers.

At line number 7400, the value of the ER2 register is saved in the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER7 register, and at line number 7410, the value of the ER0 register is loaded into the ER2 register. At line number 7420, the value in the ER0 register is divided by the value in the ER1 register and the quotient is ER.
Store in the 0 register.

After that, various operations are performed, and at line number 7450, the value of the ER1 register is subtracted from the value of the ER2 register and the result is stored in the ER2 register. At line number 7460, the value of the ER2 register is stored in the ER1 register. As a result, the operation result of the ER2 register is stored in the ER1 register as a return value. At line number 7470, the process returns to the random number processing of the caller.

The control processes performed by the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 described above include those in which one control process is called in response to a call command executed by another control process. There is. FIG. 109 shows an example of the relationship of such control processing. In this relationship, if one control process is called in response to a call instruction executed by another control process, one control process is a group lower than the other control processes. Set the group to belong to. Also, in the case of control processing with multiple callers,
Among the groups to which the control process listed as the caller belongs, it shall belong to the lower group with respect to the lowest group.

The relationship shown in FIG. 109 (a) is that the first control process can call a second control process different from the first control process, and the first control process is different from the first and second control processes. Different third
It is possible to call the control process. Then, the second control process and the third control process can call the fourth control process different from the first to third control processes. It should be noted that the first control process may be able to call the fifth control process different from the first to fourth control processes, or the fifth control process may be able to call the fourth control process. Is also good. Further, the first control process may be able to directly call the fourth control process.

In this relationship, the first control process belongs to the first group, and the second, third, and fifth control processes called by the first control process belong to the second group. Further, the fourth control process called by the control process belonging to the second group belongs to the third group.

In the processing in the game control device 100, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is the first control processing, the special figure 1 game processing (FIG. 19) is the second control processing, and the special figure 2 game processing (FIGS. 20 and 21). ) Is the third control process, 2-byte data acquisition process (FIG. 52) is the fourth control process, and the normal figure game process (FIG. 52).
FIG. 50) can be associated with the fifth control process.

Further, in the processing in the game control device 100, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is the first control processing, the special figure 1 game processing (FIG. 19) is the second control processing, and the special figure 2 game processing (FIG. 20, FIG. 21
) Can be associated with the third control process, and the fanfare / interval processing (FIG. 42) can be associated with the fourth control process.

Further, in the processing in the game control device 100, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is the first control processing, the special figure 1 game processing (FIG. 19) is the second control processing, and the special figure 2 game processing (FIG. 20, FIG. 21
) Is the third control process, the symbol variation control process (FIG. 53) is the fourth control process, and the normal figure game process (.
FIG. 50) can be associated with the fifth control process. The 1-byte subtraction process (FIG. 54)
And the 1-byte addition process (FIG. 55) is set as a sixth control process different from the first to fifth control processes.
It can be said that the fourth control process can call the sixth control process.

Further, it is also possible to associate the effect command setting process (FIG. 56), which may be called from a plurality of control processes, as the fourth control process. For example, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11)
To the first control process, the special figure 1 game process (FIG. 19) to the second control process, and the special figure 2 game process (FIG. 19).
20 and 21) are associated with the third control process, and the normal game process (FIG. 50) is associated with the fifth control process, and control processes called by each of the second, third, and fifth control processes (for example). , Special figure 1
Each of the normal process, the special figure 2 normal process, and the normal figure normal process) is designated as the sixth to eighth control processes (not shown), and the effect command setting process (FIG. 56) called from the sixth to eighth control processes is the fourth. It can be associated as a control process.

In the processing in the effect control device 300, the hall setting mode processing (FIG. 78) is the first control processing, the hall volume adjustment processing (FIG. 79) is the second control processing, and the hall LED brightness adjustment processing (FIG. 80).
) Is the third control process, and the minus update process (FIG. 84) and the plus update process (FIG. 85) are the fourth.
The liquid crystal luminance adjustment process (step C518) can be associated with the fifth control process in the control process.

Further, in the process of the effect control device 300, the player setting mode process (FIG. 81) is used as the first control process, the player volume adjustment process (FIG. 82) is used as the second control process, and the player LED brightness adjustment process (FIG. 81).
FIG. 83) is the third control process, and the minus update process (FIG. 84) and the plus update process (FIG. 85).
Can be associated with the fourth control process.

In the process of the game control device 100, a register for storing an argument and a return value is specified regardless of the above relationship. As a register for storing the argument, for example, line number 11 in FIG.
As shown in 80 and 1190, the A register and the HL register are mainly used, and for example, as shown in the line number 2340 of FIG. 91, the HL register is mainly used as the register for storing the return value. That is, the register for storing the argument and the return value is defined for each control process regardless of the group to which the control process belongs.

The CPU 111A of the game control device 100 does not have so many registers that can be used, and the registers to be used are set regardless of the group so that the limited registers can be used efficiently. Further, if the register to be used is determined for each group, it is necessary to move the value between the registers when storing the return value. However, since the capacity of the ROM 111B is limited in the game control device 100, the same register is used regardless of the group to eliminate the need for the process of moving the value between the registers, and the program capacity is reduced.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, the groups set as described above are basically associated with the registers used by the control processing of each group. Further, in the present embodiment, the order of the group and the order of the register correspond to each other. The ranking of the groups is such that the first group is the highest, and the second group, the third group, and so on are ranked lower in this order. The order of the registers is that the R0 register is the highest register, the R1 register, the R2 register, and so on.
The ranking is lower in the order of. The R0 register may or may not correspond to the start address of the register. The order and order of the addresses of each register may or may not correspond.

For example, the control process belonging to the third group mainly uses the R2 register, and the control process belonging to the second group, which is the upper group of the third group, mainly uses the upper R of the R2 register.
I try to use one register. In addition, the first group, which is a higher group of the second group.
In the control process belonging to the group, the R0 register higher than the R1 register is mainly used.

Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), as a register for storing the return value to the control process of the caller, a register corresponding to the group of the caller is used. for example,
In the random number process (FIG. 107) called in the random number update process (step C12) and the range correction process (FIG. 108) called in the random number process, the random number update process belongs to the first group and the random number process belongs to the second group. , The range correction process belongs to the third group. In this relationship
In the range correction processing belonging to the third group, processing is mainly performed using the R2 register, and finally R
The return value is transferred from the 2 register to the R1 register (line number 7460). again,
In the random number processing belonging to the second group, the processing is mainly performed using the R1 register, and finally the return value is transferred from the R1 register to the R0 register (line number 7290).

Further, in principle, in the control process belonging to the third group, the return value is stored in the R1 register, but in the negative update process shown in FIG. 105 and the positive update process shown in FIG. 106, FIG.
As shown in 9 (c), the return value is stored in the R0 register. This is because the negative update process and the positive update process are also called from the control process belonging to the first group. In such a case, the return value is stored in the register used by the uppermost group among the groups to which the control process of the caller belongs. Therefore, in the minus update process and the plus update process, the return value is stored in the R0 register used by the control process belonging to the first group.

Correspondingly, in the hole setting mode process shown in FIG. 99 and the player setting mode process shown in FIG. 102 belonging to the first group, when the minus update process and the plus update process belonging to the third group are called, the minus update process and the plus update process belong to the third group. The argument is stored in the R1 register, which is a register used by the process belonging to the second group. That is, the argument is stored in the register used by the group one level higher than the group to which the called process belongs.

Since the effect control device 300 has a margin in the register of the CPU 311 and the capacity of the PROM 321, it is possible to predetermine the register to be used in this way. By predetermining the registers to be used for each group to which the control processing belongs in this way, the registers used in the control processing are naturally determined in the development of each control processing, and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, since the current hierarchy can be known by looking at the return address at the time of development, it is possible to improve the efficiency of development in an easy-to-understand manner even when the program is looked back at later or when others see it. Also, for example, if the register of the return value and the register used for processing match, it may be necessary to temporarily store the return value in RAM, but by defining the register to be used for the return value by the group. , There is no need to perform such processing.

Although it is assumed that the registers having the same rank as the rank of the group are used, the lower register may be used as the group becomes lower, and the registers do not necessarily have the same rank. In other words, if the control processing hierarchy is deep (group rank is low), there is a high possibility that the register near the beginning (register with high rank) is used, so do not use the register near the beginning for the return value. Just do it. The higher the hierarchy, the more vacant the first register becomes, so it can be used. In other words, the deeper the control processing hierarchy (the lower the rank of the group), the farther the register from the start address (lower rank register) is used for the return value, and the shallower the control process hierarchy, the closer the register from the start address. You just have to use it.

In addition, the criteria for grouping are not limited to those related to the calling instruction and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the control process included in the special figure 1 game process is set as the first group, the control process included in the special figure 2 game process is set as the second group, and the control process included in the normal figure game process is set as the third group.
It may be a group. Further, grouping may be further performed within these first to third groups. Then, the group to be used may be associated with the group divided in this way.

Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 109 (c), for the control process called from a plurality of groups having different ranks, the register for storing the return value is set to the register corresponding to the group of the control process of the caller. May be. For example, regarding the minus update process and the plus update process, when the caller is the hole setting mode process or the player setting mode process belonging to the first group, the return value is stored in the R0 register and the caller is the second group. In the case of the hall volume adjustment process belonging to the above, the return value may be stored in the R1 register.

Further, regardless of the group to which the control process belongs, the register closest to the beginning may be preferentially used for the return value. For example, as shown in FIG. 109 (d), when there is one return value, the return value is stored in the R0 register, and when there are two return values, the first return value is stored in the R0 register and the R1 register. Stores the second return value in. When there are three return values, the first return value is stored in the R0 register, the second return value is stored in the R1 register, and the third return value is stored in the R2 register.

When there are a plurality of return values, even if the size of each return value is small and fits in the registers of the same group (same layer), the return values are stored in the registers of different groups (layers) as described above. For example, even if the two return values are assigned to R0L and R0H in 1-byte size, the first is stored in R0L and the second is stored in R1L.

When the number of return values is four or more, the first return value is stored in the R0 register, the second return value is stored in the R1 register, and the third return value is stored in the R2 register. Further, the fourth and subsequent return values are stored in the RAM 322. Starting to use RAM 322 for storing return values The number of return values is not limited to 4, and can be set to any number. For example, even if one return value is stored in RAM 322 without using a register. Alternatively, it may be stored in the RAM 322 when the return value is 8 or more. Further, the stack area may be used instead of or in combination with the RAM 322.

Since there is a limit to the types of registers, it may be difficult to determine the registers to be used for each group when the number of groups increases (the hierarchy becomes deeper), but if you always use from the beginning, there will be insufficient registers. Can be avoided. Further, by using another area such as RAM 322 together, it becomes possible to deal with any number of return values.

In addition, the arguments can be used in the same order of register use as the return value, and when there are multiple arguments, the register closest to the beginning is preferentially used as described above.
For example, in the processes shown in FIGS. 99 to 104, the arguments for calling the minus update process are stored in the order of ER0 and R1L. That is, it is used as register 0, register 1, ... In this case, if there are more than a predetermined number of arguments, another area such as RAM 322 may be used together. Further, in the process shown in FIGS. 99 to 104, the argument when calling the plus update process is E.
It is stored in the order of R0, R1L, R1H .... In this way, two registers in the same layer may be used in order, or registers in different layers may be used one by one as described above.

In FIG. 109 (d), the register to be used is shown as Rx (x is a number), but the same applies to any of the ERx, Ex, Rx, RxH, and RxL systems in the register structure shown in FIG. It can be used. Further, registers of different systems may be used in any combination. For example, R0, E1, ER2, R3H, R3L, R4L ... may be used in this order. Further, it may be used from the beginning of one system so as to use E0 ... E7 after using R0 ... R7, and when all the systems are used, it may be used from the beginning of another system. In this case, only a part of each system may be used, such as R4, R5, R6, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7.

Further, although it is assumed that they are used in order from the beginning, conversely, they may be used in order from the rear end.
Further, the order of the registers used in the return value and the order of the registers used in the argument may be the same or different. Further, the order of registers used for arguments and return values may be determined according to the group set for each control process. For example, when the control process to which the control process belongs is called, the arguments are stored in the registers according to the order set corresponding to the group to which the control process belongs.

From the above, the control means (control means) for controlling the game in the game machine that executes the game based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. The effect control device 300) is provided, the control means includes an arithmetic processing means (CPU311) including a plurality of registers, and one control process is called in response to a call instruction executed by another control process. In the case of, when the return value returned by one control process to another control process is stored in the register, the return value is stored in each of the plurality of registers according to a predetermined order. .. Therefore, in the development of each control process, the registers used in the control process are naturally determined, and the efficiency of the development can be improved. In addition, it is easy to understand which value is stored in which register, and it is easy to verify the program, so that the efficiency of development can be improved.

Further, the control means sets the order in the order of the codes assigned to identify each of the plurality of registers. Therefore, it is easy to understand which value is stored in which register, and it is easy to verify the program, and the efficiency of development can be improved. The reference numerals assigned to identify each of the plurality of registers are ER0 to E in the above embodiment.
Each code is R7, E0 to E7, R0 to R7, R0H to R07, and R0L to R7L. The register whose number part is 0 is the first register, and the order in which the value of the number part increases is the normal order. The ranking is set. Therefore, in the above embodiment, it can be said that the control means sets the order from the beginning of the address in the order of the register address.

In addition, a control means (effect control device) that controls the game in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. 300), and the control means is an arithmetic processing means (300) including a plurality of registers.
A CPU 311) and a storage means (RAM 322) capable of storing information related to control are provided, and one control process is called in response to a call instruction executed by another control process. When storing the return value returned by one control process to another control process in a register,
Return values are stored in each of a plurality of registers according to a predetermined order, and if there are more than a predetermined number of return values, the return values up to a predetermined number are stored in the plurality of registers according to the order and a predetermined number. It means that the above return value is stored in the storage means. therefore,
Even if the return value increases, it can be handled.

In addition, a control means (effect control device) that controls the game in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. 300), and the control means is an arithmetic processing means (300) including a plurality of registers.
CPU311) is provided, and when the argument set when one control process executes a call instruction and calls another control process is stored in a register, it is stored in each of a plurality of registers in a predetermined order. It means that it was done. Therefore, in the development of each control process, the registers used in the control process are naturally determined, and the efficiency of the development can be improved. In addition, it is easy to understand which value is stored in which register, and it is easy to verify the program, so that the efficiency of development can be improved.

Further, the control means sets the order in the order of the codes assigned to identify each of the plurality of registers. Therefore, it is easy to understand which value is stored in which register, and it is easy to verify the program, and the efficiency of development can be improved.

Further, the control means includes a storage means (RAM 322) capable of storing information related to the control.
When there are a predetermined number or more of arguments, up to a predetermined number of arguments are stored in the plurality of registers according to the order, and the predetermined number or more of the arguments are stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to deal with a large number of return values.

In addition, a control means (effect control device) that controls the game in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. 300), and the control means is an arithmetic processing means (300) including a plurality of registers.
When a CPU 311) is provided, a group to which each control process belongs is predetermined to be one of a plurality of groups for a part or all of the plurality of control processes, and the group to which the control process belongs executes the defined control process. It means that the register corresponding to the group to which the control process belongs is used. Therefore, in the development of each control process, the registers used in the control process are naturally determined, and the efficiency of the development can be improved. In addition, it is easy to understand which value is stored in which register, and it is easy to verify the program, so that the efficiency of development can be improved.

Further, the control means predetermines the order for each of the plurality of groups and predetermines the order for each of the plurality of registers, so that one control process corresponds to a calling instruction executed by another control process. For those that are called, make sure that one control process belongs to a lower group than the other control processes, and if the group to which it belongs executes the specified control process, the group to which the control process belongs. It means that the register of the rank corresponding to the rank is used. Therefore, in the development of each control process, the registers used in the control process are naturally determined, and the efficiency of the development can be improved. In addition, it is easy to understand which value is stored in which register, and it is easy to verify the program, so that the efficiency of development can be improved.

Further, when one control process returns a value to another control process, the control means returns a value by using a register having a rank according to the rank of the group to which the one control process belongs. ..
Therefore, when setting the register for storing the return value, it may be set according to the group, and the efficiency of development can be improved.

In addition, a control means (game control device) that controls a game in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. 100, the effect control device 300), and the control means includes the first control process and
The second control process called in response to the first call instruction executed in the first control process, and the first
The third control process called in response to the second call command executed in the control process, and the fourth control process called in response to the third call command executed in the second control process and the third control process. , Will be feasible. Therefore, each control process can be developed independently, and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, the relationship between each control process becomes clear, and it becomes easier to grasp the state of arguments and return values, which can improve the efficiency of development.

Further, the control means is called in response to the fifth control process called in response to the fourth call instruction executed in the first control process and the third call instruction executed in the fifth control process. 4 Control processing and can be executed. Therefore, each control process can be developed independently, and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, the relationship between each control process becomes clear, and it becomes easier to grasp the state of arguments and return values, which can improve the efficiency of development.

In the example shown in FIG. 110A, the first control process can call a second control process different from the first control process, and the second control process is different from the first and second control processes. It is possible to call the third control process, and it is also possible for the first control process to directly call the third control process. Then, the fourth control process different from the first to third control processes can call the fifth control process different from the first to fourth control processes, and the fifth control process performs the third control process. It is possible to call it, and it is also possible for the fourth control process to directly call the third control process.

In this relationship, the first control process and the fourth control process belong to the first group, and the second and fifth control processes called by the control processes belonging to the first group belong to the second group. Further, the third control process called by the control process belonging to the second group belongs to the third group.

In the process of the game control device 100, the modified examples shown in FIGS. 57 to 60 correspond to the special figure 1.
The game process (FIG. 19) is the first control process, the special figure 1 display process (FIG. 57) is the second control process, the 2-byte data acquisition process (FIG. 52) is the third control process, and the special figure 2 game. The process (FIGS. 20 and 21) can be associated with the fourth control process, and the special FIG. 2 display process (FIG. 58) can be associated with the fifth control process.

Further, it is also possible to associate the effect command setting process (FIG. 56), which may be called from a plurality of control processes, as the third control process. For example, special figure 1 game processing (FIG. 19).
Is associated with the first control process, and the special figure 2 game process (FIGS. 20 and 21) is associated with the fourth control process. Each of the process and the special figure 2 normal process) may be designated as the second and fifth control processes (not shown), and the effect command setting process (FIG. 56) called from the second and fifth control processes may be associated with the third control process. It is possible. It should be noted that the normal figure game process (FIG. 50) is associated with the fourth control process, the normal figure normal process called by the normal figure game process is set as the fifth control process, and the effect command setting process called from the fifth control process ( It is also possible to associate FIG. 56) with the third control process.

In the processing of the effect control device 300, the hall setting mode processing (FIG. 78) is set as the first control processing.
The hall volume adjustment process (FIG. 79) and the hall LED brightness adjustment process (FIG. 80) are set as the second control process, and the minus update process (FIG. 84) and the plus update process (FIG. 85) are set as the third control process. The mode process (FIG. 81) can be associated with the fourth control process, the player volume adjustment process (FIG. 82) with the fifth control process, and the player LED brightness adjustment process (FIG. 83) with the fifth control process.

It should be noted that the third control process may be one that is commonly called from the first control process and the second control process, which are different groups from the third control process. Therefore, in the process of calling the third control process from the first control process, one or a plurality of steps of the control process may be called, or the first control process may be called.
One or a plurality of stages of control processing may be called between the control process and the second control process, or between the second control process and the third control process.

From the above, a control means (control means) for controlling a game in a game machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. The game control device 100 and the effect control device 300) are provided, and the control means includes a first control process, a second control process called in response to a first call command executed in the first control process, and a first control. It is possible to execute the third control process called in response to the third call instruction executed in the process and the second control process. Therefore, each control process can be developed independently, and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, the relationship between each control process becomes clear, and it becomes easier to grasp the state of arguments and return values, which can improve the efficiency of development.

In addition, a control means (game control device) that controls a game in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. 100, the effect control device 300), and the control means includes the first control process and
The second control process called in response to the first call instruction executed in the first control process, and the first
A fourth control process that is different from the control process and the second control process, a fifth control process that is called in response to a second call command executed by the fourth control process, a first control process, and a second control process. , The third control process called in response to the third call instruction executed in the fourth control process and the fifth control process can be executed. Therefore, each control process can be developed independently, and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, the relationship between each control process becomes clear, and it becomes easier to grasp the state of arguments and return values, which can improve the efficiency of development.

In the example shown in FIG. 110 (b), in the first period, as the A process, the first control process can call a second control process different from the first control process, and the second control process is the first. And the second
It is possible to call a third control process different from the control process, and it is also possible for the first control process to directly call the third control process.

In this relationship, the first control process belongs to the first group, and the second and third control processes called by the first control process belong to the second group. Further, the fourth, fifth, and sixth control processes called by the control processes belonging to the second group belong to the third group.

In the second period different from the first period, the first control process can call the second control process different from the first control process as the B process, and the second control process is the first and second control. It is possible to call a third control process different from the process. Then, the second control process can call the fifth control process different from the first to fourth control processes, and the third control process is the first.
It is possible to call the sixth control process different from the fifth control process.

In the processing by the game control device 100, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 1) is performed as the A processing in the first period.
1) is the first control process, the special figure 1 game process (FIG. 19) is the second control process, and the special figure 2 game process (FIGS. 20 and 21) is the third control process. FIG. 42
) Can be associated with the fourth control process. That is, the first period is the period during which the special gaming state is being executed. Then, as the B process in the second period, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 24 (a).
)) Can be associated with the fifth control process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 24 (b)) can be associated with the sixth control process. That is, the second period is the period during which the special figure variation display game is being executed.

The first period and the second period are not limited to those described above. For example, it may be subdivided into a fanfare period or a round period in a special game state.
The number of periods may be a plurality of 3 or more.

Further, the hall setting mode process (FIG. 78) and the player setting mode process (FIG. 81) can be called in response to the call command executed in the main process (FIG. 63). As described above, the hall setting mode process (FIG. 78) and the player setting mode process (FIG. 81) can call the control processes having a relationship as shown in FIG. 109 (a), respectively. It can be said that these are collectively related as shown in FIG. 110 (c).

That is, in the processing in the effect control device 300, the main processing (FIG. 63) is associated with the first control processing, the hall setting mode processing (FIG. 78) is associated with the second control processing, and the player setting mode processing (FIG. FIG. 81) is associated with the third control process. Further, the hall volume adjustment process (FIG. 79).
) Or the hall LED brightness adjustment process (FIG. 80) is associated with the fourth control process, and the player volume adjustment process (FIG. 82) or the player LED brightness adjustment process (FIG. 83) is associated with the fifth control process.
Then, the minus update process (FIG. 84) or the plus update process (FIG. 85) can be associated with the sixth control process. The second control process and the third control process to the fourth control process and the fifth control process
It is also possible to call the sixth control process without going through the control process.

Based on the above, a control means (control means) for controlling a game in a game machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. The effect control device 300) is provided, and the control means is executed in the first control process, the second control process called in response to the first call command executed in the first control process, and the first control process. A third control process called in response to the second call command, a fourth control process called in response to the third call command executed in the second control process, and a fourth control process executed in the third control process. It is possible to execute the fifth control process called in response to the call instruction and the sixth control process called in response to the fifth call instruction executed in the fourth control process and the fifth control process. Become. Therefore, each control process can be developed independently, and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, the relationship between each control process becomes clear, and it becomes easier to grasp the state of arguments and return values, which can improve the efficiency of development.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically,
It has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and the same reference numerals will be given to the parts having the same configuration, and the description thereof will be omitted, and the different parts will be mainly described. The gaming machine of this modification can execute a specific effect in which the content changes according to the operation input of the player.

FIG. 111 shows an example of the specific effect in this modified example. In this specific effect, if the character 80 can make a tee shot and make a hole-in-one, it is an effect showing that it is a big hit. The player operates the touch panel 29 to operate the character 80.
You can adjust the strength of the shots that you make.

As shown in FIG. 111A, in the specific effect, an explanatory display 81 explaining the content of the effect is displayed in the upper center of the display area. Further, in the left portion of the display area, a meter display 82 indicating the strength of the force that changes according to the operation of the touch panel 29 is displayed. In this meter display 82, the center is set as a reference value, and it is shown that the force increases from the reference value as the meter extends upward, and the force decreases from the reference value as the meter extends downward. Is shown.

Further, in the lower center of the display area, an operation explanation display 83 showing an operation method of the touch panel 29 is displayed.
Is displayed, and an operable time display 84 indicating an operable time is displayed above the operation explanation display 83. The operable time is set so that the variable time of the special figure variation display game ends after the specific effect is completed.

Further, in the lower right portion of the display area, a start storage display unit 86 for displaying the number of start storages is provided. In the start storage display unit 86, the numerical value on the left side indicates the first start storage number, and the numerical value on the right side is the second.
It is designed to indicate the number of start memories. Further, below the start memory display unit 86, there is a decorative special figure variable display game display unit 8 that displays a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game.
8 is provided.

When the operable time ends as shown in FIG. 111B, the operation explanation display 83 and the operable time display 84 are erased. Here, it is shown that the meter display 82 is operated so as to perform a shot with a force three steps stronger than the reference value. After that, the character makes a shot, and if the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the effect that the ball does not enter the cup is performed as shown in FIG. 111 (c). In this production, since the shot was performed with a force stronger than the reference value, the production is performed in which the ball goes beyond the cup and comes off.
If the shot is operated with a force weaker than the reference value, the ball will not reach the cup and will come off. Of course, it is also possible to select an effect in which the adjusted force deviates regardless of whether it is stronger or weaker than the reference value. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the effect of entering the ball into the cup is performed as shown in FIG. 111 (d), and the special result is derived. The meter display 82 shows the result of the specific effect in FIGS. 111 (c) and (d).
) Will continue to be displayed until the end of the production.

Although the specific effect is performed in one special figure variation display game, it may be executed across a plurality of special figure variation display games. For example, an operable time spanning a plurality of special figure variation display games may be set to suggest or notify the result of the special figure variation display game at which the operable time ends. In this case, the result of the specific effect may be determined according to the look-ahead result at the start of the specific effect, or specified based on the result of the special figure variation display game when the operable time ends. The result of the effect may be determined, or the result of the specific effect may be determined based on the result of the special figure variation display game at the start of the special figure variation display game at which the operable time ends. May be.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main process shown in FIG. 112 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. 63. In this main process, a specific effect process for performing the process related to the specific effect as described above is performed (step C701).

[Specific production processing]
FIG. 113 shows a specific effect process called in response to a call command executed in the above-mentioned main process. In this specific effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the adjustment (shot force, etc.) in the specific effect is possible by the operation of the player (step C711).
). If it is not in the adjustable state (step C711; N), the specific effect process is terminated. Further, in the case of the adjustable state (step C711; Y), it is determined whether there is an operation of lowering the meter (step C712). The operation of lowering the meter is an operation of touching the lower area of the touch panel 29.

If there is no operation to lower the meter (step C712; N), the process proceeds to step C718. If there is an operation to lower the meter (step C712; Y), the address of the effect meter area for storing the value displayed on the meter display 82 is prepared (step C713).
The lower limit of the meter is prepared (step C714), and the set value after reaching the lower limit (here, the lower limit) is prepared (step C715). Then, a negative update process is performed (step C71).
6), the effect meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C717). The negative update process is the process shown in FIG. 84. As a result, the meter is lowered on the meter display 82 every time there is an operation to lower the meter. Further, even if the meter is lowered while the meter is in the minimum state, the minimum value remains.

Next, it is determined whether there is an operation to raise the meter (step C718). The operation of raising the meter is an operation of touching the upper area of the touch panel 29. If there is no operation to raise this meter (step C718; N), the specific effect processing is terminated. When there is an operation to raise the meter (step C718; Y), the address of the effect meter area is prepared (step C719), the upper limit value of the meter is prepared (step C720), and the set value after reaching the upper limit is prepared. (Here, the upper limit value) is prepared (step C721).

Then, a plus update process is performed (step C722), and the effect meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C723). The plus update process is the process shown in FIG. 85. As a result, the meter is raised on the meter display 82 each time there is an operation to raise the meter. In addition, even if the meter is raised in the maximum state, the maximum value remains. When there is an operation of lowering or raising the meter, the operation sound may be output at a volume corresponding to the value of the meter.

It should be noted that the specific effect accompanied by the operation of the player as described above is not limited to the effect performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game. For example, if it is executed over multiple rounds in a special game state and the player can operate it to increase the meter by a certain amount / maximum, it will be in a high probability state or enter a small hit RUSH state. It can be an effect that suggests or informs.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically,
It has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first modification described above, and the same reference numerals will be given to the parts having the same configuration, and the description thereof will be omitted, and the different parts will be mainly described. The gaming machine of this modification allows the player to set items that can be adjusted in a specific effect.

FIG. 114 shows an example of the specific effect in this modified example. It is basically the same as the specific effect in the first modification, but the player can select the item that can be adjusted by the player. This selection is made in the player setting selection mode as shown in FIG. 120 (b).
It is possible to select whether or not the player can make adjustments for two types of adjustment items, the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item, which are adjustable items in the specific effect. In "Adjustment method 1", the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item can be adjusted, in "Adjustment method 2", only the first adjustment item can be adjusted, and in "Adjustment method 3", only the second adjustment item can be adjusted. It is possible, "Adjustment method 4
In ", both adjustment items cannot be adjusted.

FIG. 114A shows a case where the adjustment method 1 is selected, and it is possible to make an adjustment by increasing the force forming the first adjustment item and decreasing the force forming the second adjustment item. FIG. 114 (b) shows the case where the adjustment method 2 is selected, and only the adjustment that reduces the force forming the first adjustment item is possible. Adjustments that increase the force forming the second adjustment item are not possible, and a concealment display 85 that conceals the meter display is performed on the portion displaying the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment item. In this concealed display 85, it is possible to execute suggestions and notifications regarding the special figure variation display game. Further, in this case, only the operation of the lower region of the touch panel 29 is possible, but when the operation of the lower region of the touch panel 29 is further performed while the force is set to the minimum value, the force returns to the reference value. There is. Of course, the upper and lower regions of the touch panel 29 may be operated so that the force can be increased or decreased within a range below the reference value.

FIG. 114 (c) shows the case where the adjustment method 3 is selected, and only the adjustment that increases the force forming the second adjustment item is possible. Adjustments that reduce the force that makes up the first adjustment item are not possible.
A concealment display 85 that conceals the meter display is performed on the portion displaying the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment item. Further, in this case, only the operation of the upper area of the touch panel 29 is possible, but when the operation of the upper area of the touch panel 29 is further performed while the force is set to the maximum value, the force returns to the reference value. There is. Of course, the upper and lower regions of the touch panel 29 may be operated so that the force can be increased or decreased within a range equal to or higher than the reference value.

FIG. 114 (d) shows the case where the adjustment method 4 is selected, and the adjustment for reducing the force forming the first adjustment item and the adjustment for increasing the force forming the second adjustment item are disabled. Meter display 82
A concealed display 85 that conceals the meter display is performed on the portion displaying.

[Hall setting mode processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, in this modification, the processing shown in FIG. 115 is performed instead of the hole setting mode processing shown in FIG. 78. In this hole setting mode process, a custom setting process (step C731) is performed, which performs a process related to a custom setting for setting whether or not the adjustment method selection itself as described above is possible.

[Custom setting process]
FIG. 116 shows a custom setting process called in response to a call instruction executed in the above-mentioned hall setting mode process. In this custom setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the custom setting is possible (step C741). What is the custom setting possible state? In the hall setting screen, the custom setting item displayed as a selectable item in this modification is selected and the selection screen as shown in FIG. 120 (a) is displayed. be.

If the custom setting is not possible (step C741; N), the custom setting process ends. Further, in the case where the custom setting is possible (step C741; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an upward cursor operation as a process for selecting an item (step C742).
.. The upward cursor operation is an operation of touching the upper area of the touch panel 29. If there is no upward cursor operation (step C742; N), the process proceeds to step C747. again,
When there is an upward cursor operation (step C742; Y), the address of the custom setting item area is prepared (step C743), and the set value after reaching the lower limit is prepared (step C7).
44). Then, a negative update process is performed (step C745), and custom setting information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C746). The negative update process is the process shown in FIG. 84.

In the custom setting screen shown in FIG. 120 (a), values are associated with each item of "valid", "invalid", and "return", and the items are arranged in order from the top with the smallest value. Note that "valid" is a setting that allows the player to select the adjustment content in the specific effect, and "invalid" is a setting that prevents the player from selecting the adjustment content in the specific effect. Each time there is an upward cursor operation, the item with the smaller corresponding value is selected in sequence, and the cursor moves upward on the custom setting screen. Also, if the item with the smallest value is selected (the cursor is on the item displayed at the top of the custom setting screen) and there is an upward cursor operation, the item with the largest value is selected and customized. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the bottom of the setting screen.

Returning to FIG. 116, it is next determined whether or not there is a downward cursor operation (step C747).
.. The downward cursor operation is an operation of touching the lower area of the touch panel 29. If there is no downward cursor operation (step C747; N), the process proceeds to step C753. again,
When there is a downward cursor operation (step C747; Y), the address of the custom setting item area is prepared (step C748), the upper limit value of the custom setting item is prepared (step C749), and the setting after the upper limit is reached. Prepare the value (step C750). Then, a plus update process is performed (step C751), and custom setting information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C752). The plus update process is the process shown in FIG. 85.

Each time there is a downward cursor operation, the item with the larger corresponding value is selected in sequence, and the cursor moves downward on the custom setting screen. Also, if the item with the largest value is selected (the cursor is on the item displayed at the bottom of the custom setting screen) and there is a downward cursor operation, the item with the smallest value is selected and customized. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the top of the setting screen.

After that, it is determined whether or not the confirmation operation has been performed (step C753). Confirm operation is "valid"
Alternatively, it is an operation of touching the left or right area of the touch panel 29 with the cursor on any of the "invalid" items. If this confirmation operation is not performed (step C753; N), the custom setting process is terminated. It should be noted that even if there is an operation of touching the left or right area of the touch panel 29 while the cursor is on the "return" item, it is assumed that there is no confirmation operation. Further, when there is a confirmation operation (step C753; Y), it is determined whether the confirmation operation is performed by selecting a valid item (step C754).

In the case of a confirmation operation by selecting a valid item (step C754; Y), in order to set a custom flag for setting the possibility of custom setting (custom setting is possible),
The ON setting process (step C755), which is a common process for setting the target flag, is called and executed, and then the custom setting process is terminated. In addition, if it is not a confirmation operation by selecting a valid item (step C754; N), that is, if it is a confirmation operation by selecting an "invalid" item, a custom flag for setting the possibility of custom setting is set. In order to clear (a state in which custom setting is impossible), the OFF setting process (step C756), which is a common process for clearing the target flag, is called and executed, and then the custom setting process is terminated.
That is, in the custom setting process, the setting selected in the process is fixed.

[Player setting mode processing]
FIG. 117 shows a player setting mode process called in response to a call command executed in the above-mentioned main process. In this modification, the process shown in FIG. 117 is performed instead of the player setting mode process shown in FIG. 81. In this player setting mode process, it is determined whether there is a custom flag set in the above-mentioned custom setting process, that is, whether the adjustment content by the player in the specific effect can be selected (step C761).

If there is no custom flag (step C761; N), the process proceeds to step C588. If there is a custom flag (step C761; Y), the player custom setting process (step C7) is a process for allowing the player to select the adjustment content in the specific effect.
62) is called and executed.

[Player custom setting process]
FIG. 118 shows a player custom setting process called in response to a calling command executed in the above-mentioned player setting mode process. In this player custom setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the player custom setting is possible (step C771). What is the player custom setting enable state? The player custom setting item displayed as a selectable item in this modification on the player setting mode screen is selected, and the selection screen as shown in FIG. 120 (b) is displayed. It is in the displayed state.

If the player custom setting is not possible (step C771; N), the player custom setting process ends. In addition, when the player custom setting is possible (step C771).
; Y) determines whether there is an upward cursor operation as a process for selecting an item (Y).
Step C772). The upward cursor operation is an operation of touching the upper area of the touch panel 29. If there is no upward cursor operation (step C772; N), step C777
Move to. When there is an upward cursor operation (step C772; Y), the address of the player custom setting item area is prepared (step C773), and the setting value after reaching the lower limit of the player custom setting item is prepared (step C773). Step C774). Then, a negative update process is performed (step C775), and custom setting information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C776). The negative update process is the process shown in FIG. 84.

In the player custom setting screen shown in FIG. 120 (b), values correspond to each item of "adjustment method 1", "adjustment method 2", "adjustment method 3", "adjustment method 4", and "return". It is attached, and the items are arranged in order from the top with the smallest value. Each time there is an upward cursor operation, items with smaller corresponding values are sequentially selected, and the cursor moves upward on the player custom setting screen. Also, if the item with the smallest value is selected (the cursor is on the item displayed at the top of the custom setting screen) and there is an upward cursor operation, the item with the largest value is selected and the game is played. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the bottom of the person custom setting screen.

Returning to FIG. 118, it is next determined whether or not there is a downward cursor operation (step C777).
.. The downward cursor operation is an operation of touching the lower area of the touch panel 29. If there is no downward cursor operation (step C777; N), the process proceeds to step C783. again,
When there is a downward cursor operation (step C777; Y), the address of the player custom setting item area is prepared (step C778), the upper limit value of the player custom setting item is prepared (step C779), and the upper limit is prepared. The set value after reaching is prepared (step C780). Then, a plus update process is performed (step C781), and custom setting information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C782). The plus update process is the process shown in FIG. 85.

Each time there is a downward cursor operation, items with large corresponding values are sequentially selected, and the cursor moves downward on the player custom setting screen. Also, if the item with the largest value is selected (the cursor is on the item displayed at the bottom of the player custom setting screen) and there is a downward cursor operation, the item with the smallest value is selected. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the top of the player custom setting screen.

After that, it is determined whether or not the confirmation operation has been performed (step C783). The confirmation operation is an operation of touching the left or right area of the touch panel 29 with the cursor on any of the items of "adjustment method 1", "adjustment method 2", "adjustment method 3", and "adjustment method 4". .. If this confirmation operation is not performed (step C783; N), the player custom setting process is terminated. In addition, "return"
It is also assumed that there is no confirmation operation when there is an operation of touching the left or right area of the touch panel 29 while the cursor is on the item. If there is a confirmation operation (step C783; Y)
Determines whether the operation is a confirmation operation by selecting an item for which the first flag is set to ON (step C784).

The first flag is a flag for setting whether or not the first adjustment item can be adjusted, and the confirmation operation of selecting an item for which the first flag is set to ON is an adjustment method that enables adjustment of the first adjustment item. This is the case where the confirmation operation is performed by selecting the adjustment method 1 or 2. When the confirmation operation is performed by selecting an item for which the first flag is set to ON (step C784; Y), the first flag is turned ON.
In order to set the state (the state in which the first adjustment item can be adjusted), the ON setting process (step C785), which is a common process for setting the target flag, is called and executed, and step C7
Move to 87. Further, when the operation is not a confirmation operation by selecting an item for which the first flag is set to ON (step C784; N), that is, when the confirmation operation is performed by selecting the adjustment method 3 or 4, the first flag is set. In order to set the OFF state (the state in which the adjustment of the first adjustment item cannot be performed), the OFF setting process (step C786), which is a common process for clearing the target flag, is called and executed, and the process proceeds to step C787.

Next, it is determined whether or not the operation is a confirmation operation by selecting an item for which the second flag is set to ON (step C787). The second flag is a flag for setting whether or not the second adjustment item can be adjusted, and the confirmation operation of selecting an item for which the second flag is set to ON is an adjustment method that enables adjustment of the second adjustment item. This is the case where the adjustment method 1 or 3 is selected and the confirmation operation is performed. When the confirmation operation is performed by selecting an item for which the second flag is set to ON (step C787; Y),
In order to set the second flag to the ON state (the state in which the second adjustment item can be adjusted), the ON setting process (step C788), which is a common process for setting the target flag, is called and executed, and then the game is played. Ends the custom setting process. Further, when the operation is not a confirmation operation by selecting an item for which the second flag is set to ON (step C787; N), that is, when the confirmation operation is performed by selecting the adjustment method 2 or 4, the second flag is set. In order to set the OFF state (the state where the adjustment of the second adjustment item is impossible), the OFF setting process (step C789), which is a common process for clearing the target flag, is called and executed, and then the player custom setting process is performed. To finish. That is, in the player custom setting process, the setting selected in the process is fixed.

In the custom setting process, not only whether or not the player can select the adjustment content in the specific effect, but also the adjustment method that can be selected by the player may be selected. For example, it may be possible to make a setting so that only adjustment methods 1 and 4 can be selected. Further, when the custom setting is invalidated so that the player cannot select the adjustment content in the specific effect, it may be possible to select which adjustment method is used to execute the specific effect.

[Specific production processing]
Further, in this modification, the specific effect processing shown in FIG. 119 is performed instead of the specific effect process shown in FIG. 113. In this specific effect processing, the first flag indicating whether or not the first adjustment item can be adjusted is the first.
It is determined whether or not there is a flag (step C791). When there is this first flag (step C791; Y), that is, when the adjustment of the first adjustment item is possible, the processing after step C712, which is the processing for performing the adjustment corresponding to the first adjustment item, is performed. The first adjustment item here is an adjustment that reduces the force. As the set value after reaching the lower limit value of the first meter, a value different depending on the selected adjustment method is set. In the case of adjustment method 1, the touch panel 29
Since adjustment is performed by operating the upper or lower region, the set value after reaching the lower limit is set to the lower limit. On the other hand, in the case of the adjustment method 2, since the adjustment is performed only by operating the lower region of the touch panel 29, the set value after reaching the lower limit value is set to 0 (reference value).

If there is no first flag (step C791; N), that is, if the first adjustment item cannot be adjusted, the first meter hidden image information is not performed and the adjustment corresponding to the first adjustment item is not performed. Is set (step C792). The first adjustment item here is an adjustment for reducing the force, and the first meter concealment image conceals the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment for reducing the force as shown in FIGS. 114 (c) and 114 (d). It is a concealed image 85. An image for suggesting or notifying the special figure variation display game to be displayed on the hidden image 85 may be set here, or an image selected in a separate process may be arranged.

Further, in this specific effect processing, it is determined whether or not there is a second flag, which is a flag indicating whether or not the second adjustment item can be adjusted (step C793). If this second flag is present (step C)
793; Y), that is, when the adjustment of the second adjustment item is possible, the processing after step C718, which is the processing for performing the adjustment corresponding to the second adjustment item, is performed. The second adjustment item here is an adjustment that increases the force. As the set value after reaching the upper limit value of the second meter, a different value is set depending on the selected adjustment method. In the case of the adjustment method 1, the adjustment is performed by operating the upper or lower area of the touch panel 29, so the set value after reaching the upper limit value is set to the upper limit value. On the other hand, in the case of the adjustment method 3, since the adjustment is performed only by operating the upper area of the touch panel 29, the set value after reaching the upper limit value is set to 0 (reference value).

If there is no second flag (step C793; N), that is, if the second adjustment item cannot be adjusted, the second meter hidden image information is not performed and the adjustment corresponding to the second adjustment item is not performed. Is set (step C794). The second adjustment item here is an adjustment that increases the force, and the second meter concealment image conceals the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment that increases the force as shown in FIGS. 114 (b) and 114 (d). It is a concealed image 85. An image for suggesting or notifying the special figure variation display game to be displayed on the hidden image 85 may be set here, or an image selected in a separate process may be arranged.

The first meter can be operated to lower the value, and the second meter can be operated to increase the value, but the present invention is not limited to this. The value may change in either direction as long as the operation of changing the values of the first meter and the second meter can be performed independently. Therefore, both the operation for the first meter and the operation for the second meter may increase the value, and in this way, the same subroutine will be called for the common processing, for example, both are positive updates. The process can be called, and only the plus update process can be called in the specific effect process. Similarly, even if both the operation on the first meter and the operation on the second meter reduce the value, only the negative update process can be called in the specific effect process.

Further, the change in the value inside the control device due to the operation and the change in the effect do not necessarily have to match. For example, the value inside the control device may increase with the operation, but the force may decrease in the production. By doing so, for example, both the operation for the first meter and the operation for the second meter can be updated to increase the value inside the control device, and only the plus update process is performed in the specific effect process. Can be called. Of course, it is also possible to assume that only the negative update process is called because the value inside the control device decreases. The change in the effect can be set to increase or decrease by setting the correspondence with the value inside the control device.

Further, it is also possible to assign other adjustment items as the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item. For example, as shown in FIG. 121, the direction of hitting the ball may be assigned as the first adjustment item, and the force of hitting the ball may be assigned as the second adjustment item. Further, for items for which adjustment is not possible, "AUTO" may be displayed assuming that the gaming machine automatically adjusts. This display is performed on one or both of the concealed display and the explanatory display 81.

Further, in the custom setting, whether or not the adjustment item can be selected for the specific effect is set, but other contents may be selectable. In addition, although the adjustment item is selected in the player custom setting, other contents may be selectable. For example, in the custom setting or the player custom setting, the attribute of the character appearing in the specific effect can be selected, and the flag corresponding to the selection may be set in the ON processing and the OFF processing. The character's line A may be displayed, and the character's line B may be displayed when the option B is selected. In addition, in the custom setting or the player custom setting, the character itself that appears in the specific effect can be selected, and the ON setting process and O
In the FF setting process, a flag corresponding to the selection may be set. Further, although the ON setting process and the OFF setting process are set as separate processes called by separate call commands, they may be collectively performed as one process called by one call command.

FIG. 122 shows the relationship between the above-mentioned control processes. The first control process is the effect control device 3
The second control process, which corresponds to the main process (FIG. 112) in 00 and is called in response to the first call command executed in the first control process, corresponds to the player setting mode process (FIG. 117). Further, the third control process called in response to the second call command executed in the first control process corresponds to the specific effect process (FIG. 119), and corresponds to the third call command executed in the second control process. The fourth control process called up corresponds to the player volume adjustment process (FIG. 82) or the player LED brightness adjustment process (FIG. 83).

In addition, the fifth control process called in response to the fourth call command executed in the third control process and the fourth control process, and the fifth call command executed in the third control process and the fourth control process. The sixth control process to be called is a minus update process (FIG. 84) or a plus update process (FIG. 8).
Corresponds to 4). Then, whether the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction are executed in the third control process and the fifth control process and the sixth control process are called corresponds to the sixth call instruction executed in the second control process. 7th control process (player custom setting process (Fig. 118))
)) Can be determined. In the seventh control process, the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction are performed.
Whether or not to execute each of the calling instructions may be determined, or whether or not the fourth calling instruction and the fifth calling instruction may be executed together may be determined.

Further, the eighth control process called in response to the seventh call command executed in the first control process corresponds to the hall setting mode process (FIG. 115), and the eighth control process includes the fourth call command and the fifth call command.
The minus update process which is the fifth control process and the sixth control process by executing the call instruction (FIG. 84).
Alternatively, it is possible to call the plus update process (FIG. 84). Further, the 9th control process (custom) called in response to the 8th call instruction executed in the 8th control process to determine whether the 6th call instruction is executed in the 2nd control process and the 7th control process is called. Setting process (Fig. 1)
It is possible to make a decision in response to 16)).

Further, in the 7th control process and the 9th control process, it is possible to execute the 9th call command and the 10th call command to call the ON setting process or the OFF setting process which are the 10th control process and the 11th control process. be. The group for defining the registers used for the tenth control process and the eleventh control process may be the same group as the fifth control process and the sixth control process, or may be a higher or lower group. Is also good.

From the above, a control means (control means) for controlling a game in a game machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. The effect control device 300) is provided, and the control means is executed in the first control process, the second control process called in response to the first call command executed in the first control process, and the first control process. For the third control process called in response to the second call command, the fourth control process called in response to the third call command executed in the second control process, and the third control process and the fourth control process. It is possible to execute the fifth control process called in response to the fourth call instruction to be executed. Therefore, each control process can be developed independently, and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, the relationship between each control process becomes clear, and it becomes easier to grasp the state of arguments and return values, which can improve the efficiency of development.

Further, the control means may be able to execute the sixth control process called in response to the fifth call instruction executed in the third control process and the fourth control process. Therefore, each control process can be developed independently, and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, the relationship between each control process becomes clear, and it becomes easier to grasp the state of arguments and return values, which can improve the efficiency of development.

Further, the control means corresponds to the seventh control process called in response to the sixth call instruction that executes in the second control process whether to execute the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction in the third control process. It will be possible to decide. Therefore, since the propriety of the call instruction executed by one control process can be controlled by another control process, each control process can be independently developed and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, the specifications can be changed without changing the relationship of each control process, and the state of arguments and return values does not need to be changed, so that the efficiency of development can be improved. In the seventh control process, it may be determined whether or not the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction can be executed, or whether or not the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction can be executed together. Is also good.

Further, the control means can execute the eighth control process called in response to the seventh call instruction executed in the first control process, and the eighth control process issues the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction. It is feasible, and it is possible to determine whether or not the sixth call instruction is executed in the second control process in response to the tenth control process called in response to the ninth call instruction executed in the eighth control process. It will be. Therefore, since the propriety of the call instruction executed by one control process can be controlled by another control process, each control process can be independently developed and the efficiency of development can be improved. In addition, the specifications can be changed without changing the relationship of each control process, and the state of arguments and return values does not need to be changed, so that the efficiency of development can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 123, the increase operation and the decrease operation may be separate operations for each of the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item. In this example, the first adjustment item is touch panel 2.
It can be increased or decreased by operating the right region and the left region of 9, and the second adjustment item can be increased or decreased by operating the upper region and the lower region of the touch panel 29. In this case, as shown in FIG. 123A, the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment in the direction corresponding to the first adjustment item extends in the left-right direction corresponding to the arrangement of the operation portion of the touch panel 29. The meter display 82 corresponding to the force adjustment corresponding to the second adjustment item may extend in the vertical direction corresponding to the arrangement of the operation portion of the touch panel 29.

Then, when only the first adjustment item can be adjusted, the second adjustment item is as shown in FIG. 123 (b).
“(AUTO)” is displayed on the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment item. In addition, a hidden image is also displayed in the explanation portion corresponding to the second adjustment item in the operation explanation display 83. In this case,
In the image illustrating the operation portion of the touch panel 29, the display indicating the position of the upper and lower regions where the operation is disabled is maintained, but may be erased. Further, "(AUTO)" is displayed after the second adjustment item "chikara" on the explanatory display 81.

Similarly, when only the second adjustment item can be adjusted, as shown in FIG. 123 (c),
“(AUTO)” is displayed on the meter display 82, the operation explanation display 83, and the explanation display 81. In addition, "(AUTO)" is displayed by superimposing it on the arrow indicating the direction in which the ball is hit. When the adjustment of the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item is disabled, "(AUTO)" is displayed in the portion corresponding to both adjustment items as shown in FIG. 123 (d).

If there is an adjustment item that cannot be adjusted, a concealed display that hides all of the corresponding parts on both the meter display 82 and the operation explanation display 83 will give a feeling of oppression, but when the player operates it, Only the operation explanation display 83 referred to in the above is a concealed display that hides all the corresponding parts to make the operation difficult to make mistakes, and the meter display 82 is only the character display of "(AUTO)" so that a feeling of oppression does not occur. I am doing it. Of course, both the meter display 82 and the operation explanation display 83 may perform a concealed display that conceals all the corresponding parts, or the meter display 8
A concealed display that hides all of the parts corresponding to only 2 is performed, and in the operation explanation display 83, "(AUT) is displayed.
Only the character display of "O)" may be displayed, or only the character display of "(AUTO)" may be displayed on both the meter display 82 and the operation explanation display 83.

[Specific production processing]
As shown in FIG. 123, when the increase operation and the decrease operation are separate operations for each of the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item, FIG. 12 is replaced with the specific effect processing shown in FIG. 119.
The specific effect processing shown in 4 is performed. In this specific effect processing, when the first flag is present (step C791; Y), the processing related to the operation of lowering the first meter corresponding to the first adjustment item (steps C712 to C716) and the first adjustment item are supported. Processes related to the operation of raising the first meter (steps C718 to C722) are performed.

When there is a first flag (step C791; Y), first, the contents of the first meter area are loaded (step C801), and the first meter display information corresponding to the value before the update is set (step). C802). In this example, when the specific effect is finished, the adjusted value is saved without being initialized, and by this process, the adjustment result in the previous specific effect is set and displayed at the start of a new specific effect. The Rukoto. If the adjusted value is initialized when the specific effect is completed, the value is always started from the reference value at the start of the specific effect.

Similarly for the second flag, when there is a second flag (step C793; Y), processing related to the operation of lowering the second meter corresponding to the second adjustment item (steps C712 to C71).
6) and the process related to the operation of raising the second meter corresponding to the second adjustment item (step C71).
8 to C722) are to be performed.

When there is a second flag (step C793; Y), first, the contents of the second meter area are loaded (step C804), and the second meter display information corresponding to the value before the update is set (step). C805). In this example, when the specific effect is finished, the adjusted value is saved without being initialized, and by this process, the adjustment result in the previous specific effect is set and displayed at the start of a new specific effect. The Rukoto.

Next, the processing when the adjustment of the volume and the brightness using the operation of the touch panel 29 and the specific effect overlap with each other will be described. FIG. 125 shows an example of a case where the specific effect is started when the player operates the touch panel 29 to adjust the volume and the brightness. In this example, the volume and brightness can be adjusted by the player operating the touch panel 29 even during the execution of the special figure variation display game.

In FIG. 125A, the volume and luminance adjustment operations are performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and the display device 41 performs the adjustment display 89 which is a display indicating the volume and luminance. The volume adjustment is increased by operating the upper area of the touch panel 29, and decreased by operating the lower area. Further, the adjustment of the brightness is increased by operating the right region of the touch panel 29, and is decreased by operating the left region.

Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (b), the specific effect is started in the state where the adjustment display 89 is performed. In this example, the operation of reducing the force, which is the first adjustment item, can be performed by operating the lower region of the touch panel 29. This operation overlaps with the operation of reducing the volume. Examples of FIGS. 125 (c) to 125 (e) can be given as handling when there is an operation in the lower region of the touch panel 29, which is an overlapping operation in such a situation.

The example shown in FIG. 125 (c) is an example in which both the value reduction and the volume reduction in the specific effect are performed. The example shown in FIG. 125 (d) is an example in which only the volume is reduced. FIG. 12
The example shown in 5 (e) is an example in which only the value is reduced in the specific effect. Any one of these can be taken. Further, the volume and brightness may not be adjusted during the execution of the specific effect.

When there is an operation in the upper area of the touch panel 29, which is a non-overlapping operation, the volume is increased. Further, when there is an operation in the left and right regions of the touch panel 29, which is a non-overlapping operation, the brightness is increased or decreased. However, in the case where the volume and brightness are not adjusted when duplicate operations are performed (for example, in the case of FIG. 125 (e)), the volume and brightness are adjusted even when there are non-overlapping operations. You may not make any adjustments.

Further, in this example, the meter display 82 of the specific effect and the volume and luminance adjustment display 89 are set to the same display mode, but different display modes may be used. For example, the number of scales on the meter display 82 may be different from that of the volume and luminance adjustment display 89, or the color saturation and brightness of the scales on the meter display 82 and the adjustment display 89 may be different. Further, the operation of the touch panel 29 used for the specific effect and the operation of the touch panel 29 used for adjusting the volume and the brightness may not overlap.

The number of scales of the adjustment display 89 for volume adjustment and the adjustment display 89 for brightness adjustment are not only the same, but different numbers of scales (for example, the volume is 10 scales and the brightness is 3 scales. The volume is 2).
The brightness may be set to 10 scales as 0 scales, etc.). In addition, a predetermined sound (for example, when it increases, it changes to Doremi Fasolaside Remi, when it decreases, the opposite of the increase, etc.) may be output as the scale increases or decreases in volume and brightness, and when the volume increases or decreases, it depends on the scale. A predetermined sound is output at a different volume (volume that changes in real time), but when the brightness is increased or decreased, it may be output at a volume corresponding to the current volume (volume set before the brightness adjustment). Further, the display mode of the scale (color, transmittance, orientation, etc. of the scale) may be different for the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment. again,
Such an adjustment display 89 can also be applied to the hall setting screen and the player setting screen shown in FIG. 77.

In addition, the player custom setting process that can be executed when waiting for customers is set to turn the first flag or the second flag ON or OFF. It may be possible to set the first flag or the second flag to be ON or OFF even in a state other than the waiting state. By doing so, the degree of freedom in changing the settings can be increased, the game content can be made to meet the player's request, and the interest of the game can be improved. For example, in the setting in the customer waiting state, it was selected not to perform the operation in the specific effect, but the effect with high expectation such as intense heat was executed in the effect executed by the specific effect, so it is in the specific effect. It is possible to meet the demands of players who have come to want the operation of.

As an operation for making such a setting, the first flag and the second flag are turned on by performing an operation different from the increase / decrease of the meter display 82, for example, by pressing and holding the effect button 25 during a specific effect.
You may try to. When the first flag and the second flag are changed to ON, the hidden image 85 interferes with the meter display 82 and should be deleted. Regarding the explanation display 81, "((
The character "(AUTO)" may be displayed when it is not displayed, the character "(AUTO)" may be left as it is, or the character "(AUTO)" may be erased and then "(AUTO)" may be displayed. A display such as a worm-eaten state in which a blank portion is left may be displayed (only "(AUTO)" is erased), or a second concealed image concealing "(AUTO)" may be displayed. Also, on the contrary,
The first flag and the second flag may be turned off by performing an operation different from the increase / decrease of the meter display 82, such as pressing and holding the effect button 25 during the specific effect. In this case, it is desirable to display a hidden image or an "(AUTO)" image, but it may be left as it is.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as the gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. In addition, the configurations of the above-mentioned modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 100 Game control device (control means)
300 Production control device (control means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions
Equipped with a production control means that controls the production related to the game
The effect control means is
It has an arithmetic processing means with multiple registers,
A rank is set for each of the plurality of registers, and the order is set.
First control processing and
The second control process called in response to the first call instruction executed in the first control process, and
A fourth control process different from the first control process and the second control process,
The fifth control process called in response to the second call instruction executed in the fourth control process, and the fifth control process.
It is possible to execute the first control process, the second control process, the fourth control process, and the third control process called in response to the third call command executed in the fifth control process.
A first register is associated with the first control process and the fourth control process.
A second register having a lower rank than the first register is associated with the second control process and the fifth control process.
A third register having a lower rank than the second register is associated with the third control process.
When a return value is returned from the third control process to each of the first control process, the second control process, the fourth control process, and the fifth control process, the first control process and the fourth control process are performed. A gaming machine characterized in that a return value is stored and returned in the first register associated with the control process .

Images